Smooth Cylinder/Low Speed Cylinder Series CY/CX
Smooth Cylinder/Low Speed Cylinder Series CY/CX
Series Variations
Smooth Cylinder CQSY/CQ2Y/CM2Y/CG1Y/CA2Y/CS2Y ································P. 1167
Series Action Bore size (mm) Minimum operating pressure (MPa) Page
CQSY 12, 16 0.03 P.1168 20, 25 0.02
CQ2Y 32, 40 0.02 P.1176 50, 63, 80, 100 0.01 CM2Y 20, 25, 32, 40 0.02 P.1189
Double acting CG1Y 20, 25, 32, 40 0.02 P.1203 50, 63, 80, 100 0.01
CA2Y 40 0.02 P.1214 50, 63, 80, 100 0.01 CS2Y 125, 140, 160 0.005 P.1228 REA REB ················································P. 1243 Low Speed Cylinder CJ2X/CUX/CQSX/CQ2X/CM2X REC Series Action Bore size (mm) Minimum operating speed (mm/s) Page CY CJ2X 10, 16 1 P.1246 CX MQ CUX 10, 16 1 P.1256 RHC 20, 25, 32 0.5 RZQ CQSX 12, 16 1 Double acting P.1261 20, 25 0.5 CQ2X 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 0.5 P.1268
CM2X D- 20, 25, 32, 40 0.5 P.1280 -X 1163 Smooth Cylinder/Low Speed Cylinder
0.07 Large
e Low speed cylinder 0.06 (Conventional model) t Standard cylinder (Example: –XB9, XB13)
0.05 q Smooth cylinder (Example: CM2Y) • Wide operating speed range • Reduce the minimum operating pressure with low friction Low pressure 0.04 Replaceable with the conventional low friction operation cylinder or the conventional low speed cylinder Sliding resistance 0.03
0.02 r Low friction cylinder
Minimum operating pressure MPa (Example: CM2Q)
0.01 w Low speed cylinder (New model) Low speed Reducing adhesion (Example: CM2X) operation Small 0 1 10 100 1000
Piston speed mm/s
q Smooth cylinder w Low speed cylinder (New model) Low speed operation (from 5 mm/s) Low speed operation (from 1 mm/s) Low pressure operation Low pressure operation Pressure on both sides Pressure on both sides • Pressing force control Reducing adhesion • Balance control of winders, etc. • Load transfer without a lateral load (Lightweight trays, etc.) • General low-speed operating applications • Transfer with less adhesion (Wafers, etc.) • Tension control • Higher-accuracy pressing force control
e Low speed cylinder (Conventional model) r Low friction cylinder t Standard non-lube cylinder Low speed operation Low pressure operation General applications Pressure on a single side
Superiority in low speed/low friction 2 Low speed cylinder 3 Low speed cylinder 5 Standard non-lube Function 1 Smooth cylinder 4 Low friction cylinder (New model) (Conventional model) cylinder q Low pressure CJ2X, CUX10 : x operation Others : w Low speed operation e Reducing adhesion r Reducing protrusion t Pressing force CJ2X, CUX10 : x control Others : y Low sliding : Excellent : Good : Usable x: Handle with caution 1164 Smooth Cylinder/Low Speed Cylinder
Selection Procedures Transfer Thrust control, handling, pressing Purposes Thrust control length Balancer 2 mm or longer 50 mm/s Less than the min. or more operating pressure Average piston speed Low pressure, Control stroke t low thrust y Less than Over the min. Thrust control length 50 mm/s operating pressure shorter than 2 mm Without balancer 500 mm/s Less than the min. or operating pressure thrust control or more Low sliding Average piston speed Low pressure, qe t low thrust y
With balancer Less than Over the min. or 500 mm/s 100 mm/s operating pressure thrust control or more Follow-up speed y
Required Less than Low adhesion w 100 mm/s Required Low adhesion Required w Not required Low adhesion w (Except CJ2X and CUX10) Not required Not required q qr q 1 Consider using the smooth cylinder. 2 Consider using the low speed cylinder (new model). 3 Consider using the low speed cylinder (conventional model). 4 Consider using the low friction cylinder 5 Consider using the standard non-lube cylinder 6 Consult with SMC.
Glossary explanation REA Average piston speed Cylinder full stroke (length) divided by air pressure operating time. Adhesive phenomenon Protrusion or delay occurs when cylinders are not operated for long hours. REB Thrust control Control the pressing force by controlling air pressure in the cylinder. Balancer Cylinders move along with the moving workpiece. Balancer follow-up speed The speed of an air cylinder moving along with the workpiece at a small stroke. REC Calculating thrust Calculate the cylinder thrust multiplying piston area by pressure. controlled. Piston area varies depending on models and bore sizes. CY
Applicable Model/Size CX 2 3 4 1 2 1 Bore Smooth cylinder Low speed cylinder (New model) Low speed Low speed Low Repre- size MQ Smooth Free Type cylinder cylinder friction sentative (mm) Compact Round Tie-rod Compact Round Small cylinder (Conventional model mount (New model) model) cylinder ø10 RHC CQS ø12 Compact CQ2 ø16 RZQ CM2 ø20 Round CG1 ø25 MB ø32 CA2 ø40 Tie-rod CS1 ø50 CS2 ø63 Small CJ2 ø80 Free mount CU ø100 : Standard ø125 ∗ : 1 Change this to a smooth cylinder. ø140 : 1 Change this to a smooth cylinder (CS2). ∗∗ ø160 D- Model CQSY CQ2Y CM2Y CG1Y CA2YCS2Y CQSX CQ2X CM2X CJ2X CUX P. 1168 P. 1176 P. 1189 P. 1203 P. 1214 P. 1228 P. 1261 P. 1268 P. 1280 P. 1246 P. 1256 -X 1165 Smooth Cylinder/Low Speed Cylinder Series CY/CX
Added compact type foot brackets.
Compact foot bracket has the same width as the cylinder. Overall width reduced by up to 43% (for ø12).
Overall width shortened. Compact foot bracket
More compact installation space possible ¡Short pitch mounting is possible. ¡Allows installation close against a wall.
New Installed state Shortened installation width
Existing model
Applicable Cylinders: CQSY, CQ2Y (Smooth Cylinder), CQSX, CQ2X (Low Speed Cylinder)
1166 Smooth Cylinder Series CQSY/CQ2Y/CM2Y/CG1Y/CA2Y/CS2Y ø12 to ø25 ø32 to ø100 ø20 to ø40 ø20 to ø100 ø40 to ø100 ø125 to ø160
Minimum operating pressure 0.005 to 0.03 MPa
0.04
12 16 0.03
20 25 32 40 0.02
50 63 80 100 0.01 125 140 160 0.005
Minimum operating pressure MPa 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 Bore size mm
(Measurement based on JIS B 8377)
Stable operation possible even at a Sliding resistance low speed of 5 mm/s Bi-directional low-friction operation possible. (Measurement based on JIS B 8377) Pressure can be controlled regardless of its direction. Smooth operation with less sticking and slipping 0.020 0.018 CQSYB12 0.016 CA2D50-200N REA -30DCM Average speed Average speed 0.014 3.0 2.52mm/s 0.012 2.60 REB 0 mm/s 0.010 Speed 0.008 -3.0 wave form REC Speed mm/s Speed 0.006 CA2YD50-200 0.004 Operating Operating OUT IN 0.002 CY 30 direction direction 0.000 Displacement 15 wave form 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 CX
Pressure equivalent to sliding resistance MPa resistance sliding to equivalent Pressure Pressure MPa 0 5 seconds
Displacement mm Displacement MQ Application Example CG1YB20 Smooth cylinder combined with precision regulator (e.g. Series IR) RHC -200 Average speed Average speed Example A Example B Measurement 3.0 RZQ 2.12 mm/s conditions 0 2.36 mm/s Driving roller Winding roller Horizontal, lateral -3.0 Speed Precision regulator Speed mm/s Speed Precision regulator No-load wave form 200 f Operating Operating Measurement direction OUT direction IN pressure (Transfer object) 100 Displacement 0.1 MPa wave form
Displacement mm Displacement 0 20 seconds
D- -X 1167 Smooth Cylinder Series CQSY ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25
How to Order CQSY B 20 30 D C
With auto switch CDQSY B 20 30 D C M9BW
With auto switch Number of auto switches (Built-in magnet) Nil 2 pcs. S 1 pc. Mounting style n n pcs. B Through-hole/Both ends tapped (Standard) L Foot style Note) Auto switch F Rod side flange style Nil Without auto switch G Head side flange style For the applicable auto switch D Double clevis style ∗ model, refer to the table below. ∗ Mounting brackets are not mounted and are supplied loose at the time of shipment. Bumper/Rod end thread Note) A compact foot style with the Rubber bumper & overall width shortened is newly Bore size C Rod end female thread added. For details, refer to page 12 12 mm 1294. Rubber bumper & 16 16 mm CM Rod end male thread 20 20 mm 25 25 mm Action Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model D Double acting Cylinder stroke (mm) If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto Refer to "Standard Stroke" switch is required, there is no need to enter on page 1169. the symbol for the auto switch. (Example) CDQSYL25-30DC
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function entry (Output) 0.5 1 3 5 connector Applicable load DC AC Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) Indicator light Indicator 3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N 5 V, 12 V IC circuit — 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P 2-wire 12 V M9BV M9B — 3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) M9PWV M9PW Relay, (2-color) Grommet 24 V — Yes 2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW — PLC 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗∗ M9NA∗∗∗ Water resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗∗ M9PA∗∗∗ (2-color indication) 2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗∗ M9BA∗∗∗
Solid state auto switch Magnetic field resistant — (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — — P3DW∗∗ — 3-wire — 5 V — A96V A96 — — — IC circuit — (Equiv. NPN) — Grommet Yes
Reed 100 V A93V A93 — — — Relay, 2-wire 24 V 12 V
auto switch No 100V or less A90V A90 — — — IC circuit PLC ∗∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ : Manufactured upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗∗ D-P3DW is compatible with ø25. 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL It is mounted away from the port side to avoid interference with fittings. 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1175. ∗ Refer to pages 1960 and 1961 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector. For D-P3DW, refer to pages 1948 and 1949. ∗ Auto switches are not mounted and are supplied loose at the time of shipment. Note) Please also confirm whether the selected auto switch can be mounted at the desired position. Auto switches of models D-A9V, M9V, M9WV and M9AV may not be mounted on the side with ports due to the cylinder stroke or the size of the fittings. 1168 Smooth Cylinder Series CQSY
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 Type Pneumatic (Non-lube) Action Double acting, Single rod Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa Ambient and Without auto switch –10 to 70°C (with no freezing) fluid temperature With auto switch –10 to 60°C (with no freezing) Cushion Rubber bumper Rod end thread Female thread +1.0 mm Note) Stroke length tolerance 0 Operating piston speed 5 to 500 mm/s Allowable leakage rate 0.5 L/min (ANR) or less Note) Stroke length tolerance does not include the amount of bumper change.
Minimum Operating Pressure Symbol Unit: MPa Rubber bumper Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 Minimum operating pressure 0.03 0.02
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) 12, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 20, 25 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit Theoretical Output
OUT IN Bore size Unit: N Kit no. Contents (mm) Bore size Rod size Operating Piston area Operating pressure (MPa) (mm) (mm) direction (mm2) 0.3 0.5 0.7 12 CQSY12-PS Piston seal 1 pc. IN 84.8 25 42 59 16 CQSY16-PS Rod seal 1 pc. 12 6 20 CQSY20-PS Tube gasket 1 pc. OUT 113 34 57 79 Grease pack (10 g) 1 pc. IN 151 45 75 106 25 CQSY25-PS 16 8 REA OUT 201 60 101 141 When only grease for maintenance is IN 236 71 118 165 necessary, please order by the following part 20 10 REB numbers. OUT 314 94 157 220 Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g) IN 378 113 189 264 25 12 REC GR-L-010 (10 g) OUT 491 147 245 344 GR-L-150 (150 g) CY Intermediate Stroke CX Method Installation of spacer on standard stroke body. Model no. Refer to page 1168 for standard model no. MQ Intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals are available by Method using spacers with standard stroke cylinders. RHC Standard stroke Bore size (mm) Stroke range (mm) Stroke range 12, 16 1 to 29 RZQ 20, 25 1 to 49 Part no.: CQSYB25-47DC CQSYB25-50DC with 3 mm width spacer inside. Example B dimension is 77.5 mm. Calculation:ø25, B dimension 27.5 mm (without auto switch) 27.5 (B dimension) + 50 (st) = 77.5 (mm)
D- -X 1169 Series CQSY
For standard strokes Weight/Without Auto Switch (g) Calculation: (Example) CQSYD20-20DCM Bore size Cylinder stroke (mm) • Basic weight: CQSYB20-20DC ······················ 114 g (mm) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 • Additional weight: Rod end male thread ·········· 10 g : Double clevis style ················ 92 g 12 37 43 50 57 63 70 — — — — 216 g 16 49 57 66 74 83 92 — — — — 20 75 88 101 114 127 140 153 165 178 191 25 109 125 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252
Weight/With Auto Switch (Built-in magnet) (g)
Bore size Cylinder stroke (mm) (mm) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 12 45 51 58 65 71 78 — — — — 16 59 67 76 85 94 103 — — — — 20 106 119 132 145 157 170 183 195 208 221 25 151 167 183 199 215 231 246 262 278 294
Additional Weight (g) Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 Male thread 1.5 3 6 12 Rod end male thread Nut 1 2 4 8 Foot style (Including mounting bolt) 55 65 159 181 Rod side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 58 70 143 180 Head side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 56 66 137 171 Double clevis style (Including pin, snap ring, bolt) 34 40 92 127
Mounting Bolt for CQSYB without Auto Switch
Mounting method: Mounting bolt for through-hole Cylinder model C D Mounting bolt part no. Cylinder model C D Mounting bolt part no. mounting style of CQSYB is CQSYB12-5DC 30 CQ-M3 x 30L CQSYB20-25DC 50 CQ-M5 x 50L available as an option. -10DC 35 x 35L -30DC 55 x 55L Refer to the following for ordering procedures. -15DC 40 x 40L -35DC 60 x 60L Order the actual number of bolts that will be used. 6.5 6.5 -20DC 45 x 45L -40DC 65 x 65L Example) CQ-M3x30 L 4 pcs. -25DC 50 x 50L -45DC 70 x 70L -30DC 55 x 55L -50DC 75 x 75L CQSYB16-5DC 30 CQ-M3 x 30L CQSYB25-5DC 35 CQ-M5 x 35L Mounting bolt -10DC 35 x 35L -10DC 40 x 40L -15DC 40 x 40L -15DC 45 x 45L 6.5 -20DC 45 x 45L -20DC 50 x 50L -25DC 50 x 50L -25DC 55 x 55L 8.5 -30DC 55 x 55L -30DC 60 x 60L CQSYB20-5DC 30 CQ-M5 x 30L -35DC 65 x 65L Note) When mounting a cylinder with -10DC 35 x 35L -40DC 70 x 70L 6.5 through-hole, be sure to use the -15DC 40 x 40L -45DC 75 x 75L attached plain washer. -20DC 45 x 45L -50DC 80 x 80L Material: Chromium molybdenum steel Surface treatment: Zinc chromated Mounting Bolt for CDQSYB with Auto Switch
Mounting method: Mounting bolt for through-hole Cylinder model C D Mounting bolt part no. Cylinder model C D Mounting bolt part no. mounting style of CDQSYB is CDQSYB12-5DC 35 CQ-M3 x 35L CDQSYB20-25DC 60 CQ-M5 x 60L available as an option. -10DC 40 x 40L -30DC 65 x 65L Refer to the following for ordering procedures. -15DC 45 x 45L -35DC 70 x 70L Order the actual number of bolts that will be used. 6.5 6.5 -20DC 50 x 50L -40DC 75 x 75L Example) CQ-M3x35 L 4 pcs. -25DC 55 x 55L -45DC 80 x 80L -30DC 60 x 60L -50DC 85 x 85L CDQSYB16-5DC 35 CQ-M3 x 35L CDQSYB25-5DC 45 CQ-M5 x 45L Mounting bolt -10DC 40 x 40L -10DC 50 x 50L -15DC 45 x 45L -15DC 55 x 55L 6.5 -20DC 50 x 50L -20DC 60 x 60L -25DC 55 x 55L -25DC 65 x 65L 8.5 -30DC 60 x 60L -30DC 70 x 70L CDQSYB20-5DC 40 CQ-M5 x 40L -35DC 75 x 75L -10DC 45 x 45L -40DC 80 x 80L Note) When mounting a cylinder with 6.5 through-hole, be sure to use the -15DC 50 x 50L -45DC 85 x 85L attached plain washer. -20DC 55 x 55L -50DC 90 x 90L Material: Chromium molybdenum steel Surface treatment: Zinc chromated 1170 Series CQSY
Dimensions/ø12 to ø25
Basic style (Through-hole/Both ends tapped): CQSYB/CDQSYB
ø12
Auto switch H thread effective depth C 2 x M5 x 0.8 2 x 4 x øOB Lead wire min. bending counterbore depth RB 2 x 4 x OA effective depth RA Note) radius 10 Q F
ø16 øI through D N E M T ø 4 x ø
Plain washer K M L B + Stroke E A + Stroke
ø20, ø25
Rod end male thread
Width across flats B1 MM
SMC
H1
C1 X L1
Rod End Male Thread Bore size (mm) B1 C1 H1 L1 MM X 12 8 9 4 14 M5 x 0.8 10.5 16 10 10 5 15.5 M6 x 1.0 12 20 13 12 5 18.5 M8 x 1.25 14 25 17 15 6 22.5 M10 x 1.25 17.5
Basic Style Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch C D E F H I K L M N OA OB Q RA RB T (mm) (mm) A B A B 12 5 to 30 25.5 22 30.5 27 6 6 25 5 M3 x 0.5 32 5 3.5 15.5 3.5 M4 x 0.7 6.5 7.5 7 4 0.5 16 5 to 30 25.5 22 30.5 27 8 8 29 5 M4 x 0.7 38 6 3.5 20 3.5 M4 x 0.7 6.5 7.5 7 4 0.5 20 5 to 50 29 24.5 39 34.5 7 10 36 5.5 M5 x 0.8 47 8 4.5 25.5 5.4 M6 x 1.0 9 8 10 7 1 25 5 to 50 32.5 27.5 42.5 37.5 12 12 40 5.5 M6 x 1.0 52 10 5 28 5.4 M6 x 1.0 9 9 10 7 1 Note ) Threaded through hole is used for the standard of ø20 with 5 to 10 mm strokes and ø25 with a 5 mm stroke.
1172 Smooth Cylinder Series CQSY
Foot style: CQSYL/CDQSYL Foot Style Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch Special cap bolt L B + Stroke (mm) (mm) A B LS A B LS 12 5 to 30 40.3 22 10 45.3 27 15 16 5 to 30 40.3 22 10 45.3 27 15
LY 20 5 to 50 46.2 24.5 12.5 56.2 34.5 22.5 LH 25 5 to 50 49.7 27.5 12.5 59.7 37.5 22.5
LX 4 x øLD X Y LT Y X LG Bore size LZ LS + Stroke (mm) LL1 LDLGLHLTLXLYLZ XY A + Stroke 12 13.5 24 4.5 2.8 17 2 34 29.5 44 8 4.5 Rod end male thread 16 13.5 25.5 4.5 2.8 19 2 38 33.5 48 8 5 20 14.5 28.5 6.6 4 24 3.2 48 42 62 9.2 5.8 25 15 32.5 6.6 4 26 3.2 52 46 66 10.7 5.8 Foot bracket material: Carbon steel L1 Surface treatment: Nickel plated
Rod side flange style: CQSYF/CDQSYF Rod Side Flange Style Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch (mm) (mm) A B A B 12 5 to 30 35.5 22 40.5 27
FV 16 5 to 30 35.5 22 40.5 27 20 5 to 50 39 24.5 49 34.5 25 5 to 50 42.5 27.5 52.5 37.5 FT FX 2 x øFD L B + Stroke FZ A + Stroke Bore size (mm) FD FT FV FX FZ L L1 12 4.5 5.5 25 45 55 13.5 24 Rod end male thread 16 4.5 5.5 30 45 55 13.5 25.5 20 6.6 8 39 48 60 14.5 28.5 25 6.6 8 42 52 64 15 32.5 Flange bracket material: Carbon steel Rod end nut ∗ Surface treatment: Nickel plated L1
Head side flange style: CQSYG/CDQSYG Head Side Flange Style Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch (mm) (mm) A B A B 12 5 to 30 31 22 36 27 FV 16 5 to 30 31 22 36 27 20 5 to 50 37 24.5 47 34.5 REA L B + Stroke FT FX 2 x øFD 25 5 to 50 40.5 27.5 50.5 37.5 A + Stroke FZ REB Bore size FD FT FV FX FZ L L1 Rod end male thread (mm) 12 4.5 5.5 25 45 55 3.5 14 REC 16 4.5 5.5 30 45 55 3.5 15.5 20 6.6 8 39 48 60 4.5 18.5 CY 25 6.6 8 42 52 64 5 22.5 Rod end nut ∗ Flange bracket material: Carbon steel L1 CX Surface treatment: Nickel plated MQ Double clevis style: CQSYD/CDQSYD Double Clevis Style Cap bolt øCB Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch RHC øCD hole H10 (mm) (mm) A B CL A B CL Rod d9 12 5 to 30 45.5 22 39.5 50.5 27 44.5 RZQ 16 5 to 30 46.5 22 40.5 51.5 27 45.5 20 5 to 50 56 24.5 47 66 34.5 57 CT CU +0.4 25 5 to 50 62.5 27.5 52.5 72.5 37.5 62.5 L B + Stroke CW RR CX +0.2 + Stroke −0.1 CL CZ −0.3 Bore size A + Stroke (mm) CB CD CT CU CW CX CZ L L1 RR Rod end male thread 12 12 5 4 7 14 5 10 3.5 14 6 16 14 5 4 10 15 6.5 12 3.5 15.5 6 20 20 8 5 12 18 8 16 4.5 18.5 9 25 24 10 5 14 20 10 20 5 22.5 10 Double clevis bracket material: Carbon steel Surface treatment: Nickel plated Rod end nut ∗ D- L1 ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. -X 1173 Series CQSY Auto Switch Mounting
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm)
D-M9WV D-M9W D-A9 D-M9 Note 1) Number of auto switches D-M9V D-A9V D-M9AV D-M9A D-P3DW
1 pc. 5 5 10 10 (5) 15 (10) 15 (5) 15 2 pcs. 5 10 10 10 15 (10) 15 (5) 15 Note 1) ø25 is only applicable for D-P3DW. Note 2) The dimensions stated in ( ) shows the minimum stroke for the auto switch mounting when the auto switch does not project from the end surface of the cylinder body and hinder the lead wire bending space. (Refer to the figure on the right.) Order auto switches separately.
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height ø12 ø16 to ø25 Mounting Mounting a) b) a) b) D-A9
D-A9V D-M9V D-M9WV D-M9AV ≅Hs ≅Hs
D-M9 D-M9W D-M9A
D-P3DW ø25 ≅Hs B
A
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto switch model D-M9V/M9WV D-A9 D-A9V D-M9/M9W D-M9A D-P3DW D-M9AV Bore size ABW A B Hs A BW A BW AB Hs A B Hs 1.5 [4] 12 1.5 0 1.5 0 17 5.5 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 7.5 5.5 3.5 19.5 — — — [5] 16 2 0 2 [4.5] 2 0 19 6 4 6 6 4 8 6 4 21.5 — — — 20 6 3.5 –1.5 [1] 6 3.5 22.5 10 7.5 2.5 10 7.5 4.5 10 7.5 25 — — — 25 7 5.5 –3.5 [–1] 7 5.5 24.5 11 9.5 0.5 11 9.5 2.5 11 9.5 27 1.5 0 32 Note 1) [ ]: Denotes the values of D-A93. Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting. Note 3) The product is shipped out of the factory in installation state “a)”. To change the electrical entry direction of the switch on the head, refer to installation state “b)”. Note 4) Negative figures for W indicate an auto switch is mounted inward from the edge of the cylinder body. 1174 Auto Switch Mounting Series CQSY
Operating Range
(mm) Bore size (mm) Auto switch model 12 16 20 25 D-A9/A9V 6 7.5 10 10 D-M9/M9V D-M9W/M9WV 3 3.5 5.5 4.5 D-M9A/M9AV D-P3DW — — — 5.5 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable. ∗ For solid state auto switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1960 and 1961 for details. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switch (D-F9G/F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911.
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
• If the cylinder is used in an application in which a magnetic material is placed in close contact around the cylinder as shown in the graph on the right (including cases in which even one of the sides is in close contact) the operation of auto switches could become unstable. Therefore, please check with SMC for this type of application. Magnetic substance Magnetic substance (Iron plate, etc.) (Iron plate, etc.)
REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1175 Smooth Cylinder Series CQ2Y ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
How to Order CQ2Y B 32 30 D C Z
With auto switch CDQ2Y B 32 30 D C Z M9BW
With auto switch Number of (Built-in magnet) auto switches Mounting style Nil 2 pcs. B Through-hole (Standard) Bore size S 1 pc. A Both ends tapped 32 32 mm Thread type n n pcs. L Foot style Note) 40 40 mm Nil Rc Auto switch F Rod side flange style 50 50 mm TN NPT Nil Without auto switch G Head side flange style 63 63 mm TF G D Double clevis style 80 80 mm ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the table ∗ Mounting brackets are 100 mm 100 Cylinder stroke (mm) below. not mounted and are Refer to "Standard Stroke" supplied loose at the on page 1177. Auto switch mounting groove time of shipment. Action Note) A compact foot style Z 4 surfaces with the overall width D Double acting Cushion shortened is newly C Rubber bumper Body option added. For details, Nil Standard (Rod end female thread) refer to page 1294. M Rod end male thread Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the auto switch. (Example) CDQ2YL40-50DCZ
Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Applicable Auto Switches/ For D-P3DW, refer to pages 1948 and 1949. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None entry (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line connector load
Indicator light Indicator (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N) 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, M9NV M9N — IC circuit — 3-wire (PNP) 12 V M9PV M9P — 2-wire 12 V M9BV M9B — — 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, M9NWV M9NW — Diagnostic indication IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) 12 V M9PWV M9PW — Relay, (2-color indication) Grommet 24 V —
Yes 2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW — — PLC 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗ — Water resistant IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) 12 V M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗ — (2-color indication)
Solid state auto switch 2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗ — — Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — — P3DW — — — 3-wire (NPN equivalent) — 5 V — A96V A96 — — — — IC circuit —
— Grommet Yes 12 V 100 V A93V A93 — — — — Relay, Reed 2-wire 24 V PLC auto switch No 5 V, 12 V 100 V or less A90V A90 — — — — IC circuit ∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ : Manufactured upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1188. ∗ Refer to pages 1960 and 1961 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector.
1176 Smooth Cylinder Series CQ2Y
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Type Pneumatic (Non-lube) Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa Ambient and Without auto switch –10 to 70°C (with no freezing) fluid temperature With auto switch –10 to 60°C (with no freezing) Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard) +1.0 mm Note) Stroke length tolerance 0 Operating piston speed range 5 to 500 mm/s Allowable leakage rate 0.5 L/min (ANR) or less Note) Stroke length tolerance does not include the amount of bumper change.
Minimum Operating Pressure Unit: MPa Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Minimum operating pressure 0.02 0.01 Symbol Rubber bumper Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) 32, 40 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100 50, 63, 80, 100 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100
Theoretical Output Replacement Parts: Seal Kit OUT IN Unit: N Bore size Bore size Operating Operating pressure (MPa) Kit no. Contents (mm) (mm) direction 0.3 0.5 0.7 IN 181 302 422 32 CQ2Y32-PS 32 40 CQ2Y40-PS Piston seal 1 pc. OUT 241 402 563 IN 317 528 739 50 CQ2Y50-PS Rod seal 1 pc. 40 63 CQ2Y63-PS Gasket 1 pc. OUT 377 628 880 IN 495 825 1155 80 CQ2Y80-PS Grease pack (10 g) 1 pc. 50 REA 100 CQ2Y100-PS OUT 589 982 1374 IN 841 1402 1962 When only grease for maintenance is 63 REB necessary, please order by the following part OUT 935 1559 2182 IN 1361 2268 3175 numbers. 80 REC Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g) OUT 1508 2513 3519 GR-L-010 (10 g) IN 2144 3574 5003 GR-L-150 (150 g) 100 CY OUT 2356 3927 5498 CX Intermediate Stroke MQ Method Installation of spacer on standard stroke body. Model no. Refer to page 1176 for standard model no. RHC Intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals are available by Method Standard using spacers with standard stroke cylinders. RZQ stroke Bore size (mm) Stroke range (mm) Stroke range 32 to 100 1 to 99 Part no.: CQ2YB50-57DCZ CQ2YB50-75DCZ with 18 mm width spacer inside. Example B dimension is 125.5 mm. Calculation:ø50, B dimension 50.5 mm (without switch) 50.5 (B dimension) + 75 (st) = 125.5 (mm)
D- -X 1177 Series CQ2Y
Mounting Bolt
Mounting method: Mounting bolt for through-hole mounting style of CQ2YB is Mounting bolt available as an option. Refer to the following for ordering procedures. Order the actual number of bolts that will be used. Example) CQ-M5x40L 2 pcs.
Mounting Bolt for CQ2YB without Auto Switch
Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. CQ2YB32- 5DC 40 CQ-M5 x 40L CQ2YB63- 10DC 60 CQ-M8 x 60L - 10DC 45 x 45L - 15DC 65 x 65L - 15DC 50 x 50L - 20DC 70 x 70L - 20DC 55 x 55L - 25DC 75 x 75L - 25DC 60 x 60L - 30DC 80 x 80L - 30DC 65 x 65L - 35DC 14.5 85 x 85L 9 - 35DC 70 x 70L - 40DC 90 x 90L - 40DC 75 x 75L - 45DC 95 x 95L - 45DC 80 x 80L - 50DC 100 x 100L - 50DC 85 x 85L - 75DC 135 x 135L - 75DC 120 x 120L -100DC 160 x 160L -100DC 145 x 145L CQ2YB80- 10DC 65 CQ-M10 x 65L CQ2YB40- 5DC 45 CQ-M5x 45L - 15DC 70 x 70L - 10DC 50 x 50L - 20DC 75 x 75L - 15DC 55 x 55L - 25DC 80 x 80L - 20DC 60 x 60L - 30DC 85 x 85L - 25DC 65 x 65L - 35DC 15 90 x 90L - 30DC 70 x 70L - 40DC 95 x 95L 7.5 - 35DC 75 x 75L - 45DC 100 x 100L - 40DC 80 x 80L - 50DC 105 x 105L - 45DC 85 x 85L - 75DC 140 x 140L - 50DC 90 x 90L -100DC 165 x 165L - 75DC 125 x 125L CQ2YB100- 10DC 75 CQ-M10 x 75L -100DC 150 x 150L - 15DC 80 x 80L CQ2YB50- 10DC 55 CQ-M6 x 55L - 20DC 85 x 85L - 15DC 60 x 60L - 25DC 90 x 90L - 20DC 65 x 65L - 30DC 95 x 95L - 25DC 70 x 70L - 35DC 15.5 100 x100L - 30DC 75 x 75L - 40DC 105 x 105L - 35DC 12.5 80 x 80L - 45DC 110 x 110L - 40DC 85 x 85L - 50DC 115 x 115L - 45DC 90 x 90L - 75DC 150 x 150L - 50DC 95 x 95L -100DC 175 x 175L - 75DC 130 x 130L Material: Chromium molybdenum steel -100DC 155 x 155L Surface treatment: Zinc chromated
1178 Smooth Cylinder Series CQ2Y
Mounting Bolt for CDQ2YB with Auto Switch (Built-in Magnet)
Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. CDQ2YB32- 5 50 CQ-M5 x 50L CDQ2YB63- 10 70 CQ-M8 x 70L - 10 55 x 55L - 15 75 x 75L - 15 60 x 60L - 20 80 x 80L - 20 65 x 65L - 25 85 x 85L - 25 70 x 70L - 30 90 x 90L - 30 75 x 75L - 35 14.5 95 x 95L 9 - 35 80 x 80L - 40 100 x 100L - 40 85 x 85L - 45 105 x 105L - 45 90 x 90L - 50 110 x 110L - 50 95 x 95L - 75 135 x 135L - 75 120 x 120L -100 160 x 160L -100 145 x 145L CDQ2YB80- 10 75 CQ-M10 x 75L CDQ2YB40- 5 55 CQ-M5 x 55L - 15 80 x 80L - 10 60 x 60L - 20 85 x 85L - 15 65 x 65L - 25 90 x 90L - 20 70 x 70L - 30 95 x 95L - 25 75 x 75L - 35 15 100 x 100L - 30 80 x 80L - 40 105 x 105L 7.5 - 35 85 x 85L - 45 110 x 110L - 40 90 x 90L - 50 115 x 115L - 45 95 x 95L - 75 140 x 140L - 50 100 x 100L -100 165 x 165L - 75 125 x 125L CDQ2YB100- 10 85 CQ-M10 x 85L -100 150 x 150L - 15 90 x 90L CDQ2YB50- 10 65 CQ-M6 x 65L - 20 95 x 95L - 15 70 x 70L - 25 100 x 100L - 20 75 x 75L - 30 105 x 105L - 25 80 x 80L - 35 15.5 110 x 110L - 30 85 x 85L - 40 115 x 115L - 35 12.5 90 x 90L - 45 120 x 120L - 40 95 x 95L - 50 125 x 125L - 45 100 x 100L - 75 150 x 150L - 50 105 x 105L -100 175 x 175L - 75 130 x 130L Material: Chromium molybdenum steel -100 155 x 155L Surface treatment: Zinc chromated REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1179 Series CQ2Y
ø32 to ø50 (Types with auto switch and without auto switch only differ in the A and B dimensions. Please refer to the table below.)
Through-hole: CQ2YB/CDQ2YB Both ends tapped style: CQ2YA/CDQ2YA
CDQ2YA Both Ends Tapped (mm)
1 thread Bore size O R R O1 R (mm) 32 M6 x 1.0 10 40 M6 x 1.0 10 50 M8 x 1.25 14
2 x P (Rc,NPT,G) Auto switch H thread effective depth C (Port size) Lead wire min. bending radius 10 4 x øN through Q F 8 x øO counterbore D Z E M ø
K L B + Stroke M A + Stroke E J W Rod end male thread Width across flats B1 MM
H1
C1 X L1
Rod End Male Thread (mm) Bore size B1 C1 H1 L1 MM X (mm) 32 22 20.5 8 28.5 M14 x 1.5 23.5 40 22 20.5 8 28.5 M14 x 1.5 23.5 50 27 26 11 33.5 M18 x 1.5 28.5
(mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch CDEFHJKLMNOPQ WZ (mm) (mm) ABAB 5 to 50 40 33 9 32 50 43 13 16 45 7.5 M8 x 1.25 4.5 14 7 34 5.5 1/8 10 49.5 14 75, 100 50 43 depth 7 5 to 50 46.5 39.5 9 40 56.5 49.5 13 16 52 7.5 M8 x 1.25 5 14 7 40 5.5 1/8 12.5 57 14 75, 100 56.5 49.5 depth 7 10 to 50 48.5 40.5 11 50 58.5 50.5 15 20 64 10.5 M10 x 1.5 7 17 8 50 6.6 1/4 10.5 71 19 75, 100 58.5 50.5 depth 8
1180 Smooth Cylinder Series CQ2Y
Foot style: CQ2YL/CDQ2YL Foot Style (mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch L B + Stroke L L1 LD (mm) (mm) A B LS A B LS 5 to 50 57.2 33 17 32 67.2 43 27 17 38.5 6.6 75, 100 67.2 43 27 Special cap bolt
LY 5 to 50 63.7 39.5 23.5 40 73.7 49.5 33.5 17 38.5 6.6 75, 100 73.7 49.5 33.5 LH 10 to 50 66.7 40.5 17.5 50 76.7 50.5 27.5 18 43.5 9 LX 4 x øLD X Y Y X LG 75, 100 76.7 50.5 27.5 LZ LT LS + Stroke Bore size Stroke range LG LH LT LX LY LZ X Y A + Stroke (mm) (mm) 5 to 50 32 4 30 3.2 57 57 71 11.2 5.8 Rod end male thread 75, 100 5 to 50 40 4 33 3.2 64 64 78 11.2 7 75, 100 10 to 50 50 5 39 3.2 79 78 95 14.7 8 L1 75, 100 Foot bracket material: Carbon steel Rod side flange style: CQ2YF/CDQ2YF Surface treatment: Nickel plated Rod Side Flange Style (mm) Without auto switch With auto switch Special cap bolt Bore size Stroke range FD FT FV FX FZ (mm) (mm) AB A B 5 to 50 50 33 32 60 43 5.5 8 48 56 65 75, 100 60 43 M FV 5 to 50 56.5 39.5 40 66.5 49.5 5.5 8 54 62 72 75, 100 66.5 49.5 FX 4 x øFD FT 10 to 50 58.5 40.5 50 68.5 50.5 6.6 9 67 76 89 FZ L B + Stroke 75, 100 68.5 50.5 A + Stroke Bore size Stroke range L1 M (mm) (mm) L 5 to 50 32 17 38.5 34 75, 100 5 to 50 40 17 38.5 40 75, 100 L1 10 to 50 50 18 43.5 50 75, 100 Head side flange style: CQ2YG/CDQ2YG Flange bracket material: Carbon steel Surface treatment: Nickel plated Special cap bolt Head Side Flange Style (mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch L L1 (mm) (mm) A A REA
M 5 to 50 48 FV 32 58 7 28.5 75, 100 58 REB 5 to 50 54.5 4 x øFD 40 64.5 7 28.5 L B + Stroke FT FX 75, 100 64.5 REC A + Stroke FZ 10 to 50 57.5 50 67.5 8 33.5 75, 100 67.5 CY ∗ Dimensions except A, L Flange bracket material: Carbon steel ()and L1 are the same as Surface treatment: Nickel plated rod side flange style. CX Double Clevis Style (mm) L1 Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch CD CT CU MQ (mm) (mm) A B CL A B CL 5 to 50 70 33 60 Double clevis style: CQ2YD/CDQ2YD 32 80 43 70 10 5 14 RHC 75, 100 80 43 70 4 x N CT 5 to 50 78.5 39.5 68.5 Cap bolt 40 88.5 49.5 78.5 10 6 14 75, 100 88.5 49.5 78.5 RZQ øCD hole H10 10 to 50 90.5 40.5 76.5 50 100.5 50.5 86.5 14 7 20 Axis d9 75, 100 100.5 50.5 86.5 Bore size Stroke range CW CX CZ L L1 N RR (mm) (mm) CU +0.4 CX +0.2 5 to 50 L B + Stroke CW RR 32 20 18 36 7 28.5 M6 x 1.0 10 –0.1 75, 100 CL + Stroke CZ –0.3 5 to 50 A + Stroke 40 22 18 36 7 28.5 M6 x 1.0 10 75, 100 10 to 50 50 28 22 44 8 33.5 M8 x 1.25 14 75, 100 Double clevis bracket material: Cast iron D- Surface treatment: Painted ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. -X L1 ∗ Double clevis pins and retaining rings are included. 1181 Series CQ2Y
ø63 to ø100 (Types with auto switch and without auto switch only differ in the A and B dimensions. Please refer to the table below.)
Through-hole: CQ2YB/CDQ2YB Both ends tapped style: CQ2YA/CDQ2YA
Both Ends Tapped (mm) O1 thread R R Bore size O1 R (mm) 63 M10 x 1.5 18 80 M12 x 1.75 22 100 M12 x 1.75 22
Lead wire min. bending 2 x P (Rc,NPT,G) radius 10 (Port size) Auto switch H thread effective 4 x øN through depth C 8 x øO counterbore Q F D Z E M ø
K LB + Stroke M A + Stroke E J W
Rod end male thread
Width across flats B1 MM
H1
C1 X L1
Rod End Male Thread (mm) Bore size B1 C1 H1 L1 MM X (mm) 63 27 26 11 33.5 M18 x 1.5 28.5 80 32 32.5 13 43.5 M22 x 1.5 35.5 100 41 32.5 16 43.5 M26 x 1.5 35.5
(mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch C D E F H J K L M N O P Q W Z (mm) (mm) AB A B 10 to 50 54 46 14 63 64 56 15 20 77 10.5 M10 x 1.5 7 17 8 60 9 1/4 15 84 19 75, 100 64 56 depth 10.5 10 to 50 63.5 53.5 17.5 80 73.5 63.5 21 25 98 12.5 M16 x 2.0 6 22 10 77 11 3/8 16 104 25 75, 100 73.5 63.5 depth 13.5 10 to 50 75 63 17.5 100 85 73 27 30 117 13 M20 x 2.5 6.5 27 12 94 11 3/8 23 123.5 25 75, 100 85 73 depth 13.5
1182 Smooth Cylinder Series CQ2Y
Foot style: CQ2YL/CDQ2YL Foot Style (mm) L B + Stroke Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch L L1 LD (mm) (mm) A B LS A B LS 10 to 50 72.2 46 20 63 82.2 56 30 18 43.5 11 75, 100 82.2 56 30 Special cap bolt LY 10 to 50 85 53.5 23.5 80 95 63.5 33.5 20 53.5 13 75, 100 95 63.5 33.5 LH 10 to 50 98 63 29 100 108 73 39 22 53.5 13
LX 4 x øLD X Y LT Y X LG 75, 100 108 73 39 LZ LS + Stroke Bore size Stroke range LG LH LT LX LY LZ X Y A + Stroke (mm) (mm) 10 to 50 63 5 46 3.2 95 91.5 113 16.2 9 75, 100 10 to 50 80 7 59 4.5 118 114 140 19.5 11 75, 100 10 to 50 100 7 71 6 137 136 162 23 12.5 L1 75, 100 Foot bracket material: Carbon steel Rod side flange style: CQ2YF/CDQ2YF Surface treatment: Nickel plated Rod Side Flange Style (mm) Special cap bolt Without auto switch With auto switch Bore size Stroke range FD FT FV FX FZ (mm) (mm) AB A B 10 to 50 64 46 63 74 56 9 9 80 92 108 75, 100 74 56 M FV 10 to 50 73.5 53.5 80 83.5 63.5 11 11 99 116 134 75, 100 83.5 63.5 4 x øFD FT 10 to 50 85 63 FX 100 95 73 11 11 117 136 154 FZ L B + Stroke 75, 100 95 73 A + Stroke Bore size Stroke range L L1 M (mm) (mm) 10 to 50 63 18 43.5 60 75, 100 10 to 50 80 20 53.5 77 75, 100 L1 10 to 50 100 22 53.5 94 Head side flange style: CQ2YG/CDQ2YG 75, 100 Flange bracket material: Carbon steel Special cap bolt Surface treatment: Nickel plated Head Side Flange Style (mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch L L1 (mm) (mm) REA M A A FV 10 to 50 63 63 73 8 33.5 75, 100 73 REB 4 x øFD L B + Stroke FT FX 10 to 50 74.5 80 84.5 10 43.5 A + Stroke FZ 75, 100 84.5 REC 10 to 50 86 100 96 12 43.5 75, 100 96 CY ∗ Dimensions except A, L Flange bracket material: Carbon steel ()and L1 are the same as Surface treatment: Nickel plated rod side flange style. CX L1 Double Clevis Style (mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch CD CT CU MQ Double clevis style: CQ2YD/CDQ2YD (mm) (mm) A B CL A B CL 4 x N 10 to 50 98 46 84 63 108 56 94 14 8 20 RHC Cap bolt 75, 100 108 56 94 øCD hole H10 CT 10 to 50 119.5 53.5 101.5 Axis d9 80 129.5 63.5 111.5 18 10 27 75, 100 129.5 63.5 111.5 RZQ 10 to 50 142 63 120 100 152 73 130 22 13 31 75, 100 152 73 130 Bore size Stroke range (mm) (mm) CW CX CZ L L1 N RR CU +0.4 CX+0.2 + Stroke 10 to 50 L B CW RR –0.1 63 30 22 44 8 33.5 M10 x 1.5 14 CZ –0.3 75, 100 CL + Stroke 10 to 50 A + Stroke 80 38 28 56 10 43.5 M12 x 1.75 18 75, 100 10 to 50 100 45 32 64 12 43.5 M12 x 1.75 22 75, 100 Double clevis bracket material: Cast iron D- Surface treatment: Painted ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. -X L1 ∗ Double clevis pins and retaining rings are included. 1183 Series CQ2Y
Weight
Weight/Without Auto Switch (g) Bore size Cylinder stroke (mm) (mm) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 75 100 32 134 154 174 193 213 233 252 272 291 311 457 556 40 211 232 254 275 297 318 340 361 383 404 577 689 50 — 369 402 435 467 500 533 566 598 632 902 1073 63 — 557 595 633 671 709 747 786 824 862 1189 1386 80 — 983 1043 1104 1164 1224 1284 1345 1405 1465 1985 2281 100 — 1711 1792 1872 1952 2033 2113 2194 2274 2354 3086 3494
Additional Weight (g) Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Both ends tapped style 6 6 6 19 45 45 Male thread 26 27 53 53 120 175 Rod end male thread Nut 17 17 32 32 49 116 Foot style (Including mounting bolt) 142 154 243 320 690 1057 Rod side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 180 214 373 559 1056 1365 Head side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 165 198 348 534 1017 1309 Double clevis style (Including pin, retaining ring, mounting bolt) 151 196 393 554 1109 1887 Calculation: (Example) CQ2DS32-20DCMZ • Basic weight: CQ2BS32-20DCZ ···················· 193 g • Additional weight: Both ends tapped style ········· 6 g Rod end male thread ·········· 43 g Double clevis style ············ 151 g 393 g
Weight/With Auto Switch (Built-in magnet) (g) Additional Weight (g)
Bore size Cylinder stroke Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 (mm) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 75 100 Both ends tapped style 6 6 6 19 45 45
32 191 211 230 250 270 289 309 329 348 368 468 567 Male thread 26 27 53 53 120 175 Rod end male thread 40 284 305 327 348 369 391 412 434 455 477 589 701 Nut 17 17 32 32 49 116
50 — 480 513 546 579 611 644 677 710 743 915 1087 Foot style (Including mounting bolt) 142 154 243 320 690 1057
63 — 710 748 787 825 863 901 939 977 1015 1211 1408 Rod side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 180 214 373 559 1056 1365
80 — 1229 1289 1350 1410 1470 1530 1591 1651 1711 2008 2305 Head side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 165 198 348 534 1017 1309
100 — 2070 2150 2231 2311 2391 2472 2552 2633 2713 3121 3529 Double clevis style (Including pin, retaining ring, mounting bolt) 151 196 393 554 1109 1887
Calculation: (Example) CQ2DS32-20DCMZ • Basic weight: CQ2BS32-20DCZ ····················250 g • Additional weight: Both ends tapped style ········· 6 g Rod end male thread ·········· 43 g Double clevis style ············ 151 g 450 g
Add each weight of auto switches when auto switches are mounted.
Additional Weight (g) Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Both ends tapped style 6 6 6 19 45 45 Male thread 26 27 53 53 120 175 Rod end male thread Nut 17 17 32 32 49 116 Foot style (Including mounting bolt) 142 154 243 320 690 1057 Rod side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 180 214 373 559 1056 1365 Head side flange style (Including mounting bolt) 165 198 348 534 1017 1309 Double clevis style (Including pin, retaining ring, mounting bolt) 151 196 393 554 1109 1887
1184 Series CQ2Y Auto Switch Mounting 1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
D-A9 ø32 to ø100 ≅U A B D-M9 D-M9W D-M9A D-A9V D-M9V D-M9WV D-M9AV
D-A7 D-F7NT ø32 to ø100 D-A80 D-A73C D-A7H D-A80C D-A80H D-J79C D-F7 D-A79W D-J79 D-F7WV U D-F7W D-F7V ≅ D-J79W A B D-F79F
D-P3DW ø32 to ø100
≅U A B
REA REB Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) REC Auto switch D-M9/D-M9V D-A72/A7H/A80H D-M9W D-A73C/A80C/F7 model D-A9 D-A73 D-M9WV D-F79F/J79/F7V D-F7NT D-A79W D-P3DW CY D-A9V D-M9A D-A80 D-J79C/F7W D-M9AV D-J79W/F7WV Bore size A B A B AB A B A B AB AB CX 32 14 9 18 13 15 10 15.5 10.5 20.5 15.5 12.5 7.5 8 3.5 40 17.5 12 21.5 16 18.5 13 19 13.5 24 18.5 16 10.5 11.5 6.5 MQ 50 15 15.5 19 19.5 16 16.5 16.5 17 21.5 22 13.5 14 9.5 9.5 63 17.5 18.5 21.5 22.5 18.5 19.5 19 20 24 25 16 17 12 12.5 RHC 80 20.5 23 24.5 27 21.5 24 22 24.5 27 29.5 19 21.5 15 17 100 23.5 29.5 27.5 33.5 24.5 30.5 25 31 30 36 22 28 18 24 RZQ Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto switch D-F7/J79 model D-F7 W/J79W D-F7V D-A7 D-A73C D-M9V D-A9V D-F7BA D-J79C D-A79W D-P3DW D-F79F/F7NT D-F7WV D-A80 D-A80C D-A7H/A80H Bore size U U U U U U U U U 32 30 27.5 36 36.5 39.5 34 40.5 37.5 33 40 32 30 38 40 42.5 37.5 43.5 40.5 36.5 50 37.5 35 43.5 45 48 43 49 46 42 D- 63 42.5 40.5 48.5 50.5 53.5 48 54.5 51.5 47 80 51 49 57 59 61.5 56.5 62.5 59.5 55.5 100 59 57 65.5 67 70 64.5 71 68 65.5 -X 1185 Series CQ2Y Auto Switch Mounting 2
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm)
D-A9V D-F7W D-M9V D-A7 D-M9WV D-M9 Number of D-M9W D-A7H D-J79W D-F7V D-A80 D-A9 D-M9AV D-F7 D-A79W D-P3DW auto switches D-M9A D-A80H D-F79F D-J79C D-A73C D-F7WV D-J79 D-F7NT D-A80C
1 pc. 5 5 10 (5) 10 15 (5) 15 (10) 15 (5) 15 20 (10) 15 2 pcs. 5 10 10 15 15 (5) 15 15 (10) 20 20 (15) 15 Note) The dimensions stated in ( ) shows the minimum stroke for the auto switch mounting when the auto switch does not project from the end surface of the cylinder body and hinder the lead wire bending space. (Refer to the figure below.) Order auto switches and auto switch mounting brackets separately.
Operating Range
(mm) Bore size (mm) Auto switch model 32 40 50 63 80 100 D-A9(V) 9 9.5 9.5 11 10.5 10.5 D-M9(V) D-M9W(V) 5 5 6 6.5 7 7.5 D-M9A(V) D-A7(H)(C) 10.5 11.5 11 13 11.5 11.5 D-A80(H)(C) D-A79W 14 15.5 14.5 17 15 15.5 D-F7(V) D-J79(C) D-F7W(V) 5 5 5 6 7 8 D-F7NT D-F79F D-P3DW 3 4.5 4.5 6 5.5 6.5 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment. ∗ Auto switch mounting brackets BQ2-012 are not used for sizes over ø32 of D- A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V)/M9A(V) types. The above values indicate the operating range when mounted with the conventional auto switch installation groove.
1186 Auto Switch Mounting Series CQ2Y
Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.
Applicable Cylinder Series: CDQ2
D-M9/M9V D-F7/F7V/J79/J79C/F7W Applicable D-M9 W/M9 WV J79W/F7 WV/D-F7BA/F7BAV D-P3DW auto switch D-M9A/M9AV F79F/F7NT/D-A7/A80/A7H D-A9/A9V A80H/A73C/A80C/A79W
Bore size (mm) ø32 to ø100 Auto switch mounting BQ5-032 BQ6-032S bracket part no.
¡Auto switch fixing screw (M2.5 x 10L) ¡Hexagon socket head cap screw (M 2.5 x 6L) ¡Auto switch mounting screw (M3 x 8L) ¡Auto switch mounting bracket (nut) ¡Auto switch spacer Weight: 5 g ¡Auto switch mounting nut Auto switch Weight: 3.5 g mounting bracket fitting parts lineup/Weight When requesting the enclosure of the auto switch mounting brackets (2 pcs.) with the cylinder for shipment, add “-BQ” to the end of the cylinder model number. Standard model no. + BQ Example) CDQ2B32-30DZ-BQ
Surfaces with auto switch mounting slot A/B/C side except port side Surfaces with auto switch mounting slot
Port side
Auto switch C A mounting surface
B
qInsert the nut into the auto switch mounting qFix the auto switch and the auto switch mounting slot on the cylinder tube, and place it in the bracket temporarily by tightening the hexagon socket Auto switch mounting screw roughly estimated setting position. head cap screw (M2.5 x 9.5L) attached to the auto wWith the lower tapered part of the auto switch switch 1 to 2 turns. spacer facing the outside of the cylinder tube, wInsert the temporarily tightened mounting bracket into line up the M2.5 through hole with the M2.5 the mating groove of the cylinder tube, and slide the female thread of the auto switch mounting nut. auto switch onto the cylinder tube through the groove. To insert the auto switch onto the cylinder/actuator eGently screw the auto switch mounting nut through the groove, first hold the back of the auto Auto switch fixing screw (M2.5) into the thread of the auto switch (lead wire side) and the back of the auto switch switch mounting nut through the mounting hole. mounting bracket together. rEngage the ridge on the auto switch mounting eCheck the detecting position of the auto switch and fix arm with the recess in the auto switch spacer. the auto switch firmly with the hexagon socket head REA tTighten the auto switch mounting screw (M3) cap screw (M2.5 x 6L, M2.5 x 9.5L).∗ to fix the auto switch. The tightening torque of rIf the detecting position is changed, go back to step w. the M3 screw must be 0.35 to 0.45 N·m. ∗ The hexagon socket head cap screw (M2.5 x 6L) is REB ¡When tightening the auto switch mounting screw, yConfirm where the mounting position is, and used to fix the mounting bracket and cylinder tube. use a watchmakers' screwdriver with a handle 5 to tighten the auto switch fixing screw (M2.5) to This enables the replacement of the auto switch 6 mm in diameter. fix the auto switch mounting nut. The without adjusting the auto switch position. REC tightening torque of the M2.5 screw must be Note 1) Ensure that the auto switch is covered with the Mounting of Tightening torque for auto 0.25 to 0.35 N·m. mating groove to protect the auto switch. auto switch Note 2) The tightening torque of the hexagon socket switch mounting screw (N·m) uThe detection position can be changed under CY the conditions in step t. head cap screw (M2.5 x 6L, M2.5 x 9.5L) must Auto switch model Tightening torque be 0.2 to 0.3 N·m. D-M9(V) Note 3) Tighten the hexagon socket head cap screws CX Auto switch mounting screw evenly. D-M9W(V) 0.05 to 0.15 (M3 x 0.5 x 8 L) D-M9 A(V) Hexagon socket head cap screw MQ Auto switch D-A9(V) 0.10 to 0.20 (attached to the auto switch) (M 2.5 x 9.5 L) Auto switch fixing screw (M 2.5 x 0.45 x 10 L) Hexagon socket head cap screw RHC (M2.5×6L)
Auto switch spacer RZQ Auto switch mounting bracket Auto switch mounting nut
Note) Auto switch mounting bracket and auto switch are enclosed with the cylinder for shipment. Auto switch mounting bracket for the D-F7BA(V) type uses BQ5-032 normal specifications (metal screw).
D- -X 1187 Series CQ2Y Auto Switch Mounting 3
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features Applicable bore size D-A72 D-A73 Grommet (Perpendicular) D-A80 Without indicator light D-A79W Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Reed D-A73C Connector (Perpendicular) D-A80C Without indicator light D-A72H D-A73H, A76H Grommet (In-line) D-A80H Without indicator light ø12 to ø100 D-F7NV, F7PV, F7BV ø125 to ø160 D-F7NWV, F7BWV Grommet (Perpendicular) Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) D-F7BAV Water resistant (2-color indication) D-J79C Connector (Perpendicular) Solid state D-F79, F7P, J79 D-F79W, F7PW, J79W Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) D-F7BA Grommet (In-line) Water resistant (2-color indication) D-F79F With diagnostic output (2-color indication) D-F7NT With timer ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911. ∗ Trimmer auto switch (D-F7K) and heat resistant solid state auto switch (D-F7NJ) are not available.
1188 Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order CM2Y L 40 150
With auto switch CDM2Y L 40 150 M9BW C
With auto switch Number of Made to Order (Built-in magnet) auto switches For details, refer to page 1190. Mounting style Nil 2 pcs. S 1 pc. B Basic style Bore size n n pcs. Auto switch mounting L Axial foot style Note) 20 20 mm bracket F Rod side flange style Note) This symbol is indi- 25 25 mm Auto switch G Head side flange style cated when the D-A9 32 32 mm Nil Without auto switch or M9 type auto C Single clevis style 40 40 mm switch is specified. D Double clevis style ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the table below. This mounting bracket U Rod side trunnion style does not apply to other auto switches (D-C7 T Head side trunnion style Thread type Cylinder stroke (mm) Refer to "Standard Stroke" and H7, etc.) (Nil) Rc E Integral clevis style Nil on page 1190. Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model NPT BZ Boss-cut basic style TN If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto FZ Boss-cut rod side flange style TF G switch is required, there is no need to enter UZ Boss-cut rod side trunnion style the symbol for the auto switch. (Example) CDM2YB20-100
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None Applicable load entry (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line connector
Indicator light Indicator (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N) REA 3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N — — 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P — — REB M9BV M9B — — 2-wire 12 V — Connector — H7C — — Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39A — — — — — IC circuit REC conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39A — — — — — — Relay, Yes 3-wire (NPN) 24 V — M9NWV M9NW — Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit PLC 3-wire (PNP) M9PW — CY (2-color indication) M9PWV 2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW — — Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗∗ M9NA∗∗∗ — Water resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ — CX Solid state auto switch 3-wire (PNP) M9PA (2-color indication) M9PAV 2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗∗ M9BA∗∗∗ — — With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire(NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — — IC circuit MQ 3-wire (NPN equivalent) 5 V — — — — — IC circuit — Yes A96V A96 100 V A93V A93 — — — Grommet No 100 V or less A90 — — — — IC circuit RHC 12 V A90V Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54 — — — Relay, No 200 V or less — B64 — — — — — PLC RZQ Yes — — C73C — — Connector 2-wire 24 V No 24 V or less — C80C — — IC circuit Terminal 12 V — — A33A — — — — — PLC
Reed auto switch conduit — A34A — — — — — Yes 100 V, 200 V — Relay, DIN terminal — A44A — — — — — PLC Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — — B59W — — — — ∗∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ : Manufactured upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗ Do not add the suffix (N) indicating “no lead wire” to the part numbers of models D-A3A, 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL A44A, G39A and K39A. 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ None ········· N (Example) H7CN ∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1202. D- ∗ Refer to pages 1960 and 1961 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector. ∗ D-A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V)/M9A(V) auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.) ∗ D-C7/C80/H7 auto switches are assembled at the time of shipment. -X 1189 Series CM2Y
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Action Double acting, Single rod Piston speed 5 to 500 mm/s Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa Ambient and fluid Without auto switch –10 to 70°C (with no freezing) temperature With auto switch –10 to 60°C (with no freezing) Lubrication Non-lube Integral clevis Stroke length tolerance +1.4 Symbol 0 mm Double acting: Single rod, Rubber bumper Cushion Rubber bumper Allowable leakage rate 0.5 L/min (ANR) or less Minimum Operating Pressure Unit: MPa Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Made to Order Minimum operating pressure 0.02 (For details, refer to pages 2009 to 2152.) Symbol Specifications Mounting Bracket Part No. -XA Change of rod end shape -XC3 Special port location Bore size (mm) Description (when ordering Mounting bracket Minimum -XC6 Made of stainless steel order 20 25 32 40 a minimum number) -XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/adjustable retraction type Axial foot∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B Foot 2 pcs., Mounting nut 1 pc. -XC13 Auto switch rail mounting style Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B Flange 1 pc. -XC20 Head cover axial port Single clevis∗∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B Single clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs. Double clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs., Double clevis (with pin) ∗∗, ∗∗∗ 1 CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B Clevis pin 1 pc., Retaining ring 2 pcs. Precautions Trunnion 1 pc., Trunnion (with nut) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B Trunnion nut 1 pc. Be sure to read before handling. ∗ When ordering foot brackets, order 2 pieces per cylinder unit. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety ∗∗ Three liners are included in the clevis bracket for adjusting an angle when mounting it. Instructions and pages 3 to 12 ∗∗∗ Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included. for Actuator and Auto Switch Mounting Bracket and Accessory Precautions. Standard Option Accessory Note 3) Note 4) Note 6) Note 7) Mounting Rod end Clevis Single Double Clevis Pivot Pivot Mounting knuckle knuckle bracket Handling Precautions nut nut pin joint joint bracket bracket pin Basic style (1 pc.) — — Warning Axial foot style (2) — — 1. Do not rotate the cover Rod side flange style (1) — — — — • When installing a cylinder or screwing a fitting into the port, the coupling portion of the cover may be Head side flange style (1) — — damaged if the cover rotates. Integral clevis style — Note 1) — Note 1) Caution Single clevis style — — — Double clevis style Note 3) — Note 1) Note 5) — — — 1. Be careful of the retaining ring to pop out. Note 2) • When replacing the rod seal, be careful of the Rod side trunnion style (1) — — Note 2) — retaining ring not to pop out while removing it. Head side trunnion style (1) — — Boss-cut basic style (1) — — Boss-cut flange style (1) — — — — Replacement Part: Rod Seal Boss-cut trunnion style (1) — — Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached to the integral clevis, single clevis and double clevis types. Bore size Note 2) Trunnion nuts are mounted on the rod side trunnion style and head side trunnion style. Part no. (mm) Note 3) Pins and retaining rings (cotter pins in case of ø40) are packed with the double clevis and double knuckle joint styles. 20 KB01587 Note 4) Pins and retaining rings are packed with clevis brackets. 25 KB01588 Note 5) Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included in clevis pins. 32 KB01590 Note 6) Pivot brackets come with pins and retaining rings. 40 KB01592 Note 7) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings. Standard Stroke Grease Pack for Maintenance
When only grease for maintenance is necessary, Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) please order by the following part numbers. 20, 25, 32, 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300 Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g) Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.) GR-L-010 (10 g) Note 2) As the stroke increases, more sliding resistance may result due to the deflection of the GR-L-150 (150 g) piston rod and other factors. Take measures such as the installation of a guide. 1190 Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y
Weight (kg) Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Calculation: (Example) CM2YL32-100 • Basic weight·················0.44 (Foot style, ø32) Basic style 0.14 0.21 0.28 0.56 • Additional weight··········0.08/50 stroke Axial foot style 0.29 0.37 0.44 0.83 • Cylinder stroke·············100 stroke 0.44 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 0.60 kg Flange style 0.20 0.30 0.37 0.68 Clevis integrated style 0.12 0.19 0.27 0.52 Basic weight Single clevis style 0.18 0.25 0.32 0.65 Double clevis style 0.19 0.27 0.33 0.69 Trunnion style 0.18 0.28 0.34 0.66 Boss-cut basic style 0.13 0.19 0.26 0.53 Boss-cut flange style 0.19 0.28 0.35 0.65 Boss-cut trunnion style 0.17 0.26 0.32 0.63 Additional weight per each 50 mm of stroke 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.13 Clevis bracket (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.14 0.14 Option Single knuckle joint 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.23 bracket Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.20
Low Friction Cylinder Mounting
CM2Y Mounting style Bore size Stroke X1854
Same mounting specification as CM2Q
In order to adjust the mounting dimensions of the low friction cylinder (CM2Q), extend the longitudinal dimension (S, ZZ) by 3 mm.
Specifications Cylinder bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Action Double acting, Single rod Direction of low friction Dual directions REA Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa REB Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa ∗ Low friction operates in dual directions. REC CY Dimensions CX MQ RHC S + Stroke RZQ ZZ + Stroke
Bore size (mm) S ZZ 20 65 119 25 65 123 32 67 125 40 91 157 ∗ Add 3 mm to S and ZZ dimensions of the double acting, single rod type on pages 1192 to 1196 for the dimensions for each mounting bracket other than the basic style. D- -X 1191 Series CM2Y
Basic Style (B)
CM2YB Bore size Stroke
G Width across flats B2 H2 G 2 x P 2 x NN 1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G) I Width across flats B ø h8 E D NA ø 2 x ø MM Effective thread length AL 1.5 1.5 NA 2 x FL Width across flats KA AFNK N H S + Stroke F ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20–0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 116 0 25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 120 0 32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 122 0 40 24 21 22 41 14 32 0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 154
Boss-cut (mm) Bore size (mm) ZZ 20 103 25 107 32 109 40 138
Axial Foot Style (L)
CM2YL Bore size Stroke
H KA F G 2 x P Width across flats B1 AL H2 (Rc, NPT, G) GF 2 x NN H1 (Effective thread length 2 x FL) Width across flats KA I D ø ø 2 x øLC B 4 x øLD MM LH N Width across flats NA N Width across flats B2 Y X S + Stroke X Y LX LT Z LS + Stroke LZ ZZ + Stroke
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product. (mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 D F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ MM N NA NN P S X Y Z ZZ 20 18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 20 8 21 131 25 22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 20 8 25 135 32 22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 20 8 25 137 40 24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4 7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 23 10 27 171
1192 Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y
Rod Side Flange Style (F)
CM2YF Bore size Stroke 4 x øFD Width across flats B2 H2 G 2 x P G Mounting hole 2 Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN C (Rc, NPT, G) I h8 D ø B E FY ø ø
2 x øFD FX MM Effective thread length Mounting hole AL Width across flats NA 1.5 ø40 FZ Width across 2 x FL A K FT N ø20 to ø32 flats KA Z N H S + Stroke F ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product. (mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D EF FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 37 116 0 25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 41 120 0 32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 41 122 0 40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 45 154
Boss-cut Style (mm) Bore size (mm) ZZ 20 103 25 107 32 109 40 138 REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1193 Series CM2Y
Head Side Flange Style (G) CM2YG Bore size Stroke
Effective thread length 2 x FL H2 Width across flats B2 2 x øFD 4 x øFD Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN G 2 x P G 2 Mounting hole (Rc, NPT, G) C Mounting hole h8 I D ø E B ø FY ø
MM AL 1.5 Width across flats NA N FX Width across flats KA A K F N FZ ø40 S + Stroke FT H ø20 to ø32 Z + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product. (mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I 0 20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 0 25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 0 32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 0 40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5
(mm) Bore size (mm) K KA MM N NA NN PS Z ZZ 20 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 107 116 25 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 111 120 32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 113 122 40 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 143 154
Single Clevis Style (C) CM2YC Bore size Stroke
+0.058 Effective thread length FL øCDH10 0 Width across flats B1 H1 NN G 2 x P G I (Rc, NPT, G) ø h8 CI D NA ø E ø ø
–0.1 MM AL 1.5 CX –0.2 Width across flats KA A K F N NU NA H S + Stroke L Z + Stroke RR ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CI CD CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 13 24 9 10 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142 0 25 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146 0 32 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148 0 40 24 21 22 38 10 15 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188
1194 Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y
Double Clevis Style (D)
CM2YD Bore size Stroke
+0.058 Effective thread length FL øCD hole H10 0 –0.040 CL Width across flats B1 H1 NN G 2 x P G Axis d9 –0.076 I (Rc, NPT, G) ø h8 D CI E NA ø ø ø
+0.2 MM AL 1.5 N U CX+0.1 Width across flats KA A K F N CZ H S + Stroke L NA Z + Stroke RR ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 13 9 24 25 10 19 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142 0 25 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146 0 32 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148 0 40 24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188 ∗ Clevis pin and snap ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together.
Rod Side Trunnion Style (U) CM2YU Bore size Stroke
Width across flats B2 G 2 x P G 2 x NN –0.025 –0.061 Width across flats B1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G) e9 TD ø h8 I D ø ø TY E ø ø
MM Effective thread length TX AL Width across flats NA TZ Width across flats KA A K TT 1.5 2 x FL Z N N H S + Stroke F ZZ + Stroke REA
Boss-cut style REB REC CY
ZZ + Stroke CX
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product. (mm) MQ
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P 0 20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 RHC 0 25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 0 32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 RZQ 0 40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 (mm) Boss-cut Style (mm) Bore size (mm) S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ Bore size (mm) ZZ 20 62 8 10 32 32 52 36 116 20 103 25 62 9 10 40 40 60 40 120 25 107 32 64 9 10 40 40 60 40 122 32 109 40 88 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 154 40 138
D- -X 1195 Series CM2Y
Head Side Trunnion Style (T)
CM2YT Bore size Stroke
Effective thread length 2 x FL G Width across flats B2 2 x NN G 2 x P –0.025 –0.061 1 1 Width across flats B H (Rc, NPT, G) e9 TD ø I h8 TY D ø ø ø E ø
MM AL 1.5 Width across flats NA TX N Width across flats KA A K F N TZ H S + Stroke TT Z + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product. (mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P 0 20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 0 25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 0 32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 0 40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm) Bore size (mm) S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ 20 62 8 10 32 32 52 108 118 25 62 9 10 40 40 60 112 122 32 64 9 10 40 40 60 114 124 40 88 10 11 53 53 77 143.5 154
Clevis Integrated Style (E)
CM2YE Bore size Stroke
LZ + Stroke ZZ + Stroke Z + Stroke LP H S + Stroke L RR NA A K F N NU +0.058 0 AL G 2 x P G øCDH10 0 CX–0.1 (Rc, NPT, G) H1 1.5 øI h8 D CI E ø NA ø ø
MM 2 x øLD LH Width across flats B1 NN Effective thread length Width across flats KA FL LF LG
LT LY LV Refer to page 1198 for details of clevis pivot bracket.
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN 0 20 18 15.5 13 8 20 12 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 12 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 0 25 22 19.5 17 8 22 12 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 12 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 0 32 22 19.5 17 10 27 20 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 15 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 0 40 24 21 22 10 33 20 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 15 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm) Bore size (mm) P RR S U Z ZZ 20 9 62 11.5 115 124 25 9 62 11.5 119 128 32 12 64 14.5 124 136 40 12 88 14.5 153 165
1196 Series CM2Y Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint Single Knuckle Joint
I-020B, 032B Material: Rolled steel I-040B Material: Free cutting sulfur steel Y (Max.) øNDH10 MM R R1 øNDH10 MM 45° 1 R R
MM 1
øNDH10 E ø NX1 A 1 E 1 NX 1 1 U H ø A U R2 L1 Z (Min.) A1 U1 NX L1 A (mm) A (mm) Applicable bore Bore size A H MM NDH10 NX1 U1 R2 Y Z Part no. size (mm) A A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX R1 U1 +0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1 20 18 41 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 11 66 I-020B 20 46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14 +0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1 25, 32 22 45 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 14 69 I-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14 +0.070 –0.1 +0.070 –0.1 40 24 50 M14 x 1.5 12 0 16 –0.3 20 14 13 92 I-040B 40 69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 0 16 –0.3 15.5 20 Double Knuckle Joint
Y (Max.) øND hole H10 MM Axis d9
NX2 L A U2 H R2 Z (Min.) (mm)
Bore size A H L MM ND NX2 R2 U2 Y Z +0.2 20 18 41 25 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 11 66 +0.2 25, 32 22 45 25 M10 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 14 69 +0.3 40 24 50 49.7 M14 x 1.5 12 16 +0.1 13 25 13 92 Double Knuckle Joint
Y-020B, Y-032B Material: Rolled steel Y-040B Material: Cast iron
1 1 R R R R REA
øND hole H10 REB MM øND hole H10 MM Axis d9 Axis d9 REC 1 1 E L L E NX NZ NZ NX ø ø CY A1 U1 L1 A1 U1 A L1 A (mm) CX Applicable bore Applicable pin Retaining ring Part no. size A A1 E1 L L1 MM ND NX NZ R1 U1 part number Cotter pin size +0.2 MQ Y-020B 20 46 16 20 25 36 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis +0.2 Y-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 25 38 M10 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis +0.3 RHC Y-040B 40 68 22 24 49.7 55 M14 x 1.5 12 16 +0.1 38 13 25 CDP-3 ø3 x 18 L ∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for ø40) are attached. RZQ Double Clevis Pin/Material: Carbon steel (mm) Double Knuckle Pin/Material: Carbon steel (mm) Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size: ø40 Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size: ø40 CDP-1 CDP-2 CDP-1 CDP-3
2 x ø3 2 x ø3 Through hole ø Through hole ø ø ø ø ø D- Retaining ring: Type C9 for axis Cotter pin Retaining ring: Type C9 for axis Cotter pin ø3 x 18 L ø3 x 18 L ∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included. ∗ Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included. -X 1197 Series CM2Y
Rod End Nut Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2E)
Material: Carbon steel Material: Rolled steel plate d L
D LV C ø R +0.15 LX LR øLC hole +0.05 –0.040 H B Axis –0.076 (mm) Applicable bore Part no. size (mm) B C D d H
NT-02 20 13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25 5 LH LT NT-03 25, 32 17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25 6 NT-04 40 22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5 8 LF LG LE 2 x øLD LY (mm)
Mounting Nut Part no. Applicable bore L LC LD LE LF LG LH LR LT LX LY LV Applicable pin size (mm) part no. Material: Carbon steel CM-E020B 20, 25 24.5 8 6.8 22 15 30 30 10 3.2 12 59 18.4 CD-S02 d CM-E032B 32, 40 34 10 9 25 15 40 40 13 4 20 75 28 CD-S03 Note 1) Clevis bracket pins and retaining rings are included.
D Note 2) It cannot be used for single clevis style (CM2C) and double clevis style (CM2D). C ø
H B (mm) Clevis Pin (For CM2E) Applicable bore Part no. size (mm) B C D d H Material: Carbon steel SN-020B 20 26 30 25.5 M20 x 1.5 8 d9 d D ø
SN-032B 25, 32 32 37 31.5 M26 x 1.5 8 ø
SN-040B 40 41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10 m L1 m t L t (mm)
Trunnion Nut Applicable bore Applicable retaining Part no. Dd9 d L L1 m t ring part no. H Material: Carbon steel size (mm) –0.040 CD-S02 20, 25 8 –0.076 7.6 24.5 19.5 1.6 0.9 Type C 8 for axis B –0.040 CD-S03 32, 40 10 –0.076 9.6 34 29 1.35 1.15 Type C 10 for axis Note) Retaining rings are included. C D ø ø d (mm) Applicable bore Part no. size (mm) B C D d H TN-020B 20 26 28 25.5 M20 x 1.5 10 TN-032B 25, 32 32 34 31.5 M26 x 1.5 10 TN-040B 40 41 45 40.5 M32 x 2 10
Refer to page 2048 (–XB12: External stainless steel cylinder) for stainless steel mounting brackets and accessories (some are not applicable.) Refer to Best Pneumatics No.2 for pivot brackets.
1198 Series CM2Y Auto Switch Mounting 1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height Reed auto switch Solid state auto switch
D-A9 D-M9 D-M9W D-M9A ≅Hs ≅Hs 16 16
A 24.5 B A 22 B (22) (24) ( ): Values for D-A96 ( ): Values for D-M9A A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch. end of the auto switch. D-C7/C8 D-H7/H7W/H7NF
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch Auto switch
D-B5/B6/B59W D-G5NT
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch Auto switch
D-A33A/A34A D-G39A/K39A
≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø9.6) ø6.8 to ø9.6) REA REB Auto switch Auto switch REC CY D-A44A D-H7C CX Auto switch Auto switch ≅Hs ≅Hs MQ RHC G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø11.5) RZQ
D-C73C/C80C
Auto switch ≅Hs
D- -X 1199 Series CM2Y Auto Switch Mounting 2
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto switch model D-C7 D-A3 A D-H7 D-M9 (V) D-B5 D-C80 D-G39A D-H7C D-A9 (V) D-M9W (V) D-B59W D-G5NT D-B64 D-C73C D-K39A D-H7 W D-M9A (V) D-C80C D-A44A D-H7NF
Bore size (mm) A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 20 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5 25 6.5 5.5 10.5 9.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5 32 7.5 6.5 11.5 10.5 2 1 8 7 5 4 1.5 0.5 7 6 3.5 2.5 40 13.5 11.5 17.5 15.5 7 6 13 12 10 9 6.5 5.5 12 11 8.5 7.5 Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto switch D-M9 D-B5 D-M9W model D-A9 V D-B64 D-M9A D-A3 A D-M9V D-A9 D-C73C D-B59W D-C7 D-G39A D-A44A D-M9 WV D-C80C D-G5NT D-C80 D-K39A D-M9AV D-H7 D-H7C D-H7W Bore size D-H7NF (mm) Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs 20 23.5 25.5 22.5 25 60 69.5 25 26 28 25 27.5 62.5 72 32 29.5 31.5 28.5 31 66 75.5 40 33.5 35.5 32.5 35 70 79.5
1200 Auto Switch Mounting Series CM2Y
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
n: No. of auto switch (mm) No. of auto switch mounted 2 pcs. n pcs. Auto switch model 1 pc. Different surfaces Same surface Different surfaces Same surface (n-2) 20 + 35 55 + 35 (n-2) D-M9 5 20 55 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 35 55 + 35 (n-2) D-M9W 10 20 55 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 25 + 35 60 + 35 (n-2) D-M9A 10 25 60 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 15 + 35 50 + 35 (n-2) D-A9 5 15 50 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 35 35 + 35 (n-2) D-M9V 5 20 35 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 15 + 35 25 + 35 (n-2) D-A9V 5 15 25 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-M9WV 20 + 35 35 + 35 (n-2) 10 20 35 2 D-M9AV (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-C7 15 + 45 50 + 45 (n-2) 10 15 50 2 D-C80 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) D-H7 (n-2) 15 + 45 60 + 45 (n-2) D-H7W 10 15 60 2 D-H7NF (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) D-C73C (n-2) 15 + 50 65 + 50 (n-2) D-C80C 10 15 65 2 D-H7C (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-B5/B64 15 + 50 75 + 55 (n-2) 10 15 75 2 D-G5NT (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 50 75 + 55 (n-2) D-B59W 15 20 75 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) 35 + 30 (n-2) 100 + 100 (n-2) D-A3A/G39A 10 35 100 D-K39A/A44A (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) Note 3) When “n” is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. Note 1) Auto switch mounting With 2 auto switches Different surfaces Same surface A 15 3.5 REA
Auto switch model REB REC
B The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a direction CY Correct auto switch mounting position is 3.5 mm from the back (cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the auto switch and face of the switch holder. lead wire do not interfere with each other. CX D-M9 Less than 20 stroke Note 2) Less than 55 stroke Note 2) D-M9W MQ D-M9A Less than 25 stroke Note 2) Less than 60 stroke Note 2) D-A9 — Less than 50 stroke Note 2) Note 2) Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting in styles other than those in Note 1. RHC Operating Range RZQ (mm) (mm) Bore size (mm) Bore size (mm) Auto switch model Auto switch model 20 25 32 40 20 25 32 40 6 6 6 6 12 12 13 13 4 4 4.5 5 3.5 3 3.5 3 7 8.5 9 10 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9
8 8 9 9
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion) D- There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment. Note) D-A9 and D-A9V cannot be mounted on ø50. -X 1201 Series CM2Y Auto Switch Mounting 3
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm) Auto switch model 20 25 32 40
D-M9 (V) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) D-M9W (V) BM5-020 BM5-025 BM5-032 BM5-040 D-A9 (V) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) D-M9A (V) BM5-020S BM5-025S BM5-032S BM5-040S D-C7/C80 D-C73C/C80C D-H7 BM2-020A BM2-025A BM2-032A BM2-040A D-H7W D-H7NF D-B5/B64 D-B59W BA2-020 BA2-025 BA2-032 BA2-040 D-G5NT D-A3 A/A44A BM3-020 BM3-025 BM3-032 BM3-040 D-G39A/K39A Note 1) Set part number which includes the auto switch mounting band (BM2-A) and the holder kit (BJ5-1/Switch bracket: Transparent). Since the switch bracket (made from nylon) is affected in an environment where alcohol, chloroform, methylamines, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid is splashed over, so it cannot be used. Please consult SMC regarding other chemicals. Note 2) Set part number which includes the auto switch mounting band (BM2-AS) and the holder kit (BJ4-1/Switch bracket: White). Note 3) For the D-M9A (V) type auto switch, do not install the switch bracket on the indicator light.
[Stainless Steel Mounting Screw Kit] a The following set of stainless steel mounting screws is available. Use them in Switch bracket accordance with the operating environment. (Resin) (Since auto switch brackets are not included, order them separately.) BBA4: For D-C7/C8/H7 types Auto switch Note 4) Refer to page 1990 for the details of BBA4 screws. b The above stainless steel screws are used when a cylinder is shipped with Switch holder D-H7BA type auto switches. (Zinc) When only a switch is shipped independently, BBA4 screws are attached.
d Auto switch mounting screw qBJ-1: A set of a and b in the figure. wBM2-A (S): A set of c and d in the figure. Band (c) is mounted so that the projected part is on the internal side (contact side with the tube). c BJ4-1 (Switch bracket: White) Auto switch mounting band BJ5-1 (Switch bracket: Transparent)
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B — D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Solid state D-H7BA Water resistant (2-color indication) Grommet (In-line) D-G5NT With timer D-B53, C73, C76 — Reed D-C80 Without indicator light ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911. ∗ Wide range detection type, solid state auto switches (D-GNB type) are also available. Refer to page 1953 for details.
1202 Smooth Cylinder Series CG1Y ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
How to Order
CG1Y L 25 100
With auto switch CDG1Y L 25 100 M9BW C With auto switch (Built-in magnet) Made to Order For details, refer to page 1204. Mounting style Auto switch Auto switch mounting bracket Note) B Basic style Bore size Note) This symbol is indicated when the D-A9 20 20 mm Nil Without auto switch L Axial foot style or M9 type auto switch is specified. F Rod side flange style 25 25 mm ∗ For the applicable auto This mounting bracket does not apply to switch model, refer to the G Head side flange style 32 32 mm other auto switches (D-C7 and H7, table below. U ∗ Rod side trunnion style 40 40 mm etc.) (Nil) T ∗ Head side trunnion style 50 50 mm Number of auto switches D Clevis style 63 63 mm Cylinder stroke (mm) Nil 2 pcs. ∗ Not available at ø80 and ø100. 80 80 mm Refer to "Standard Stroke" S 1 pc. Note) Mounting brackets are not 100 100 mm on page 1204. n n pcs. mounted and are supplied loose at the time of shipment. Port thread type Nil Rc ø20 to ø100 Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto TN NPT ø20 to ø100 switch is required, there is no need to enter M5 x 0.8 ø20, ø25 the symbol for the auto switch. TF G ø32 to ø100 (Example) CDG1YB32-150
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Auto switch model Load voltage Lead wire length (m) Electrical Applicable bore size Pre-wired Type Special function Wiring (Output) Applicable load entry ø20 to ø63 ø80, ø100 0.5 1 3 5 None connector DC AC
Indicator light Perpendicular In-line In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N) M9NV M9N — — 3-wire (NPN) REA — — G59 — — 5 V, 12 V IC circuit M9PV M9P — — Grommet 3-wire (PNP) — — G5P — — REB M9BV M9B — — 2-wire 12 V — — K59 — — — REC Connector — H7C — — — M9NWV M9NW — — 3-wire (NPN) — — G59W — — Relay, Yes 24 V 5 V, 12 V — IC circuit CY Diagnostic indication M9PWV M9PW — — PLC 3-wire (PNP) (2-color indication) — — G5PW — — M9BWV M9BW — — CX 2-wire 12 V — Grommet — — K59W — — Solid state auto switch 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗∗ M9NA∗∗∗ — — 5 V, 12 V IC circuit MQ Water resistant 3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗∗ M9PA∗∗∗ — — (2-color indication) M9BAV∗∗∗ M9BA∗∗∗ — — 2-wire 12 V — — — G5BA∗∗∗ — — RHC With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF G59F — — IC circuit 3-wire (NPN equivalent) — 5 V — A96V A96 — — — — — IC circuit — Yes 100 V A93V A93 — — — — — RZQ Grommet No 100 V or less A90V A90 — — — — — IC circuit Yes 100 V,200 V — B54 — — — 12 V Relay, No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64 — — — — — PLC Yes — — C73C — — — Connector No 24 V or less — C80C — — — IC circuit Reed auto switch Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W — — — — — ∗∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ : Manufactured upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ None ········· N (Example) H7CN D- ∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1213. ∗ Refer to pages 1960 and 1961 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector. -X ∗ D-A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V)/M9A(V) auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.) 1203 Series CG1Y
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Action Double acting, Single rod Type Non-lube Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa Ambient and Without auto switch –10 to 70°C (with no freezing) fluid temperature With auto switch –10 to 60°C (with no freezing) Operating piston speed 5 to 500 mm/s st + 1.4 Stroke length tolerance Up to 300 0 mm Cushion Rubber bumper Basic, Axial foot, Rod side flange, Head side flange, Rod side trunnion, Mounting Head side trunnion, Clevis (in case of 90° change in port location) Allowable leakage rate 0.5 L/min (ANR) or less ∗ Rod side trunnion and head side trunnion styles are not available at ø80 and ø100. Symbol Rubber bumper Minimum Operating Pressure Unit: MPa Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Minimum operating pressure 0.02 0.01
Made to Order Standard Stroke (For details, refer to pages 2009 to 2152.) Symbol Specifications Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Note 1) -XA Change of rod end shape 20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 -XC6 Made of stainless steel 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300 -XC20 Head cover axial port Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.) Note 2) Please consult with SMC for strokes outside the above ranges. Note 3) As the stroke increases, more sliding resistance may result due to the deflection of the piston rod and other factors. Take measures such as the installation of a guide.
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
Bore size Kit no. Contents (mm) 20 CG1Y20-PS Piston seal 1 pc. 25 CG1Y25-PS Rod seal 1 pc. 32 CG1Y32-PS Tube gasket 2 pcs. 40 CG1Y40-PS Grease pack (10 g) 1 pc. When only grease for maintenance is necessary, please order by the following part numbers. Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g) GR-L-010 (10 g) GR-L-150 (150 g)
1204 Smooth Cylinder Series CG1Y
Mounting Bracket Part No. Mounting Procedure Mounting Min. Bore size (mm) Description bracket order 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Mounting procedure for trunnion Follow the procedures below when mounting a Foot x 2, Foot 2Note) CG-L020 CG-L025 CG-L032 CG-L040 CG-L050 CG-L063 CG-L080 CG-L100 pivot bracket on the trunnion. Bracket mounting bolt x 8 Trunnion bolt (With Flange x 1, ø20 to ø63 scotch grip) 4 or 5 Flange 1 CG-F020 CG-F025 CG-F032 CG-F040 CG-F050 CG-F063 CG-F080 CG-F100 times remounting Bracket mounting bolt x 4 Cylinder body possible Trunnion pin x 2, Trunnion Trunnion pin 1 CG-T020 CG-T025 CG-T032 CG-T040 CG-T050 CG-T063 — — pivot bracket x 2, Flat washer x 2 Flat washer Clevis x 1, Bracket mounting bolt x 4, Clevis 1 CG-D020 CG-D025 CG-D032 CG-D040 CG-D050 CG-D063 CG-D080 CG-D100 Trunnion pin Clevis pin x 1, Retaining ring x 2 (Put grease on the exterior.) Pivot bracket Pivot bracket 1 CG-020-24A CG-025-24A CG-032-24A CG-040-24A CG-050-24A CG-063-24A CG-080-24A CG-100-24A Pivot bracket x 1
Note) Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
Mounting procedure for clevis Weight (mm) Follow the procedures below when mounting a Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 pivot bracket on the clevis style. Basic style 0.11 0.18 0.28 0.44 0.83 1.17 2.23 3.43 ø20 to ø63 Axial foot style 0.22 0.31 0.44 0.66 1.31 1.89 3.19 5.18 Retaining Clevis pin Flange style 0.19 0.28 0.42 0.64 1.17 1.67 2.94 4.78 ring (Put grease) Cylinder body Retaining ring Trunnion style 0.12 0.20 0.31 0.49 0.97 1.31 — —
Basic weight Clevis style 0.16 0.26 0.43 0.67 1.23 1.85 2.94 4.71 Pivot bracket 0.08 0.09 0.17 0.25 0.44 0.80 0.98 1.75 Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.22 0.22 0.39 0.57 Pivot bracket Double knuckle joint (With pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 0.26 0.26 0.64 1.31 Additional weight per each 50 mm of stroke 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.15 0.22 0.26 0.35 0.49 Calculation: (Example) CG1YL20-100 • Basic weight················ 0.22 (Foot, ø20) (Foot style, ø20, 100 st) • Additional weight········· 0.05/50 stroke ø80, ø100 Retaining • Cylinder stroke············· 100 stroke ring Clevis pin Cylinder body Retaining ring • 0.22 + 0.05 x 100/50 = 0.32 kg (Put grease)
Pivot bracket
REA Precautions REB
Be sure to read before handling. REC Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions. CY Operating Precautions Disassembly/Replacement CX Warning Caution 1. Operate within the specified cylinder speed. 1. Do not replace the bushings. MQ Otherwise, cylinder and seal damage may occur. The bushings are press-fit. To replace them, they must be replaced together with the cover assembly. RHC 2. When operating a cylinder as a single side fixed (Basic/flange style), a bending moment generated at 2.To replace a seal, apply grease to the new seal before installing it. the stroke end due to vibration will be applied to the If the cylinder is put into operation without applying grease to RZQ cylinder, which may damage it. In such cases, install a the seal, it could cause the seal to wear significantly, leading to bracket to prevent vibration or lower the piston speed premature air leakage. until the cylinder does not vibrate at the stroke end. 3. Those with a bore of ø50 or more cannot be disassembled. When disassembling cylinders with bore sizes of ø20 through ø40, grip the double flat part of either the head cover or the Caution rod cover with a vise and loosen the other side with a wrench 1. Tighten clevis bracket mounting bolts with the proper or a monkey wrench, etc., and then remove the cover. When tightening torque shown listed below. re-tightening, tighten approximately 2 degrees more than the original position. (Cylinders with ø50 or larger bore sizes are ø20: 1.5 N·m, ø25 to 32: 2.9 N·m, ø40: 4.9 N·m, tightened with a large tightening torque and cannot be ø50: 11.8 N·m, ø63 to 80: 24.5 N·m, ø100: 42.2 N·m disassembled. Please contact SMC when disassembly is D- required.) -X 1205 Series CG1Y
Dimensions: ø20 to ø100
Basic style: CG1YB
GA 2 x P GB Section TA/TB Width MM H1 (Port size) across (Rc, NPT, G) flats B1 2 x TC 0 –0.05 ø I 0 –0.05 TD D E ø ø E ø ø
AL KA AKF TA 4 x TC TB TE C±0.1 8 x J H S + Stroke F TFTG NA ZZ + Stroke NA
Section TA/TB (mm) Bore size ∗ (mm) TC TDH9 TE TF TG +0.08 20 M5 x 0.8 8 0 4 0.5 5.5 +0.08 25 M6 x 0.75 10 0 5 1 6.5 +0.08 32 M8 x 1.0 12 0 5.5 1 7.5 +0.08 40 M10 x 1.25 14 0 6 1.25 8.5 +0.08 50 M12 x 1.25 16 0 7.5 2 10 +0.08 63 M14 x 1.5 18 0 11.5 3 14.5 ∗ Trunnion mounting taps for the width across flats NA are not attached to ø80 and ø100 types.
(mm) Bore size Stroke range A AL B1 CDEF H H1 I J K KA MM NA (mm) (mm) 20 Up to 200 18 15.5 13 14 8 12 2 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 depth 7 5 6 M8 x 1.25 24 25 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 14 2 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 depth 7.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 29 32 Up to 300 22 19.5 17 20 12 18 2 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 40 Up to 300 30 27 19 26 16 25 2 50 8 47 M6 x 1 depth 12 6 14 M14 x 1.5 44 50 Up to 300 35 32 27 32 20 30 2 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 depth 16 7 18 M18 x 1.5 55 63 Up to 300 35 32 27 38 20 32 2 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 depth 16 7 18 M18 x 1.5 69 80 Up to 300 40 37 32 50 25 40 3 71 13 89 M10 x 1.5 depth 22 10 22 M22 x 1.5 80 100 Up to 300 40 37 41 60 30 50 3 71 16 110 M12 x 1.75 depth 22 10 26 M26 x 1.5 100 (mm) Rc, NPT port G port Bore size Stroke range S TA TB ZZ (mm) (mm) GA GB P GA GB P 20 Up to 200 77 11 11 114 12 12 1/8 12 12 M5 x 0.8 25 Up to 300 77 11 11 119 12 12 1/8 12 12 M5 x 0.8 32 Up to 300 79 11 11 121 12 12 1/8 10 10 1/8 40 Up to 300 87 12 12 139 13 13 1/8 10 10 1/8 50 Up to 300 102 13 13 162 14 14 1/4 12 12 1/4 63 Up to 300 102 13 13 162 14 14 1/4 12 12 1/4 80 Up to 300 122 — — 196 20 20 3/8 17 17 3/8 100 Up to 300 122 — — 196 20 20 1/2 17 17 1/2
1206 Smooth Cylinder Series CG1Y
With Mounting Bracket
Axial foot style: CG1YL B LT LH
W 2 x øLC W XY (Knock pin position) XY M 4 x øLD LX Z LS + Stroke LZ ZZ + Stroke
Axial Foot Style (mm) Bore size (mm) B LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ M W X Y Z ZZ 20 34 4 6 20 53 3 32 44 3 10 15 7 47 118 25 38.5 4 6 22 53 3 36 49 3.5 10 15 7 52 123.5 32 45 4 7 25 53 3 44 58 3.5 10 16 8 53 125.5 40 54.5 4 7 30 60 3 54 71 4 10 16.5 8.5 63.5 144 50 70.5 5 10 40 67 4.5 66 86 5 17.5 22 11 75.5 169.5 63 82.5 5 12 45 67 4.5 82 106 5 17.5 22 13 75.5 169.5 80 101 6 11 55 74 4.5 100 125 5 20 28.5 14 95 202.5 100 121 6 14 65 74 6 120 150 7 20 30 16 95 206 ∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic style.
Rod side flange style: CG1YF FTF 4 x øFD ± 0.15 0 –0.05 B E ø FX
FX ±0.15 REA B H REB Head side flange style: CG1YG 4 x øFD REC CY 0 –0.05 ± 0.15 B E ø
FX CX MQ
FX ±0.15 H FFT RHC ZZ + Stroke B RZQ
Flange Style (mm) Head side flange Bore size (mm) B E F FX FD FT H ZZ 20 40 12 2 28 5.5 6 35 120 25 44 14 2 32 5.5 7 40 126 32 53 18 2 38 6.6 7 40 128 40 61 25 2 46 6.6 8 50 147 50 76 30 2 58 9 9 58 171 63 92 32 2 70 11 9 58 171 80 104 40 3 82 11 11 71 207 D- 100 128 50 3 100 14 14 71 210 Note) End boss is machined on the flange for øE. -X ∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic style. 1207 Series CG1Y
With Mounting Bracket
Rod side trunnion style: CG1YU
TR Bracket TS mounting range
e8 Trunnion Style (mm) ∗ TD Bore size TDe8 TR TS (Pin O.D.) 2 x ø (mm)
−0.025 20 8 −0.047 39 28 −0.025 25 10 −0.047 43 33 −0.032 32 12 −0.059 54.5 40 −0.032 40 14 −0.059 65.5 49 −0.032 TZ Z 50 16 −0.059 80 60 −0.032 63 18 −0.059 9 74
Bore size Rod side Head side TZ (mm) Z Z Head side trunnion style: CG1YT TR Bracket 20 47.6 46 101 mounting range TS 25 53 51 106
e8 ∗ 32 67.7 51 108
TD 40 78.7 62 125 50 98.6 71 147 (Pin O.D.) 2 x ø 63 119.2 71 147 ∗ Consists of trunnion pin, flat washer and hexagon socket head cap bolt. Note) Refer to page 1209 for pivot bracket. ∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic style.
Z + Stroke TZ
Clevis style: CG1YD ø20 to ø63 RRL 8 x J CZ C ±0.1 TT øCD hole H10 Clevis Style (mm) Axis d9 Bore size CD CX CZ L RR V (mm)
± 0.1 20 8 — 29 14 11 —
C 25 10 — 33 16 13 — 32 12 — 40 20 15 — 40 14 — 49 22 18 — 50 16 — 60 25 20 — Z + Stroke 63 18 — 74 30 22 — ZZ + Stroke TZ 80 18 28 56 35 18 26 100 22 32 64 43 22 32 (The above shows the case port location is changed by 90°.) Bore Applicable pin size TZ Z ZZ part no. (mm) ø80, ø100 L RR TZ 20 43.4 126 137 CD-G02 V øCD hole H10 CZ 25 48 133 146 CD-G25 Axis d9 32 59.4 139 154 CD-G03 40 71.4 159 177 CD-G04 50 86 185 205 CD-G05 63 105.4 190 212 CD-G06 80 64 228 246 IY-G08 100 72 236 258 IY-G10 +0.5 Note) Refer to page 1209 for pivot bracket. Z + Stroke CX+0.3 ∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic style. ZZ + Stroke
∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring are attached for the clevis style.
1208 Series CG1Y Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint Double Knuckle Joint
I-G02/G03 I-G04/G05/G08/G10 Y-G02/G03 Y-G04/G05/G08/G10 Material: Rolled steel Material: Cast iron Material: Rolled steel Material: Cast iron ø ø R1 R1
MM øND hole H10 MM øND hole H10 Axis d9 Axis d9
(mm) 1 1 L L E E NZ NZ Applicable NX Part no. AA1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX bore (mm)
+0.058 –0.2 A1 U1 NX I-G02 20 34 8.5 16 25 M8 x 1.25 10.3 11.5 8 0 8 –0.4 A1 U1 +0.058 –0.2 L1 I-G03 25,32 41 10.5 20 30 M10 x 1.25 12.8 14 10 0 10 –0.4 +0.058 –0.3 L1 I-G04 40 42 14 ø22 30 M14 x 1.5 12 14 10 0 18 –0.5 A +0.070 –0.3 A I-G05 50,63 56 18 ø28 40 M18 x 1.5 16 20 14 0 22 –0.5 +0.070 –0.3 I-G08 80 71 21 ø38 50 M22 x 1.5 21 27 18 0 28 –0.5 (mm) +0.084 –0.3 I-G10 100 79 21 ø44 55 M26 x 1.5 24 31 22 0 32 –0.5 Applicable Applicable Part no. bore A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 ND NX NZ L (mm) pin part no. +0.4 Y-G02 20 34 8.5 16 25 M8 x 1.25 10.3 11.5 8 8 +0.2 16 21 IY-G02 +0.4 Knuckle Pin Y-G03 25, 32 41 10.5 20 30 M10 x 1.25 12.8 14 10 10 +0.2 20 25.6 IY-G03 +0.5 Y-G04 40 42 16 ø22 30 M14 x 1.5 12 14 10 18 +0.3 36 41.6 IY-G04 +0.5 Y-G05 50, 63 56 20 ø28 40 M18 x 1.5 16 20 14 22 +0.3 44 50.6 IY-G05 +0.5 ø Y-G08 80 71 23 ø38 50 M22 x 1.5 21 27 18 28 +0.3 56 64 IY-G08 ø +0.5 Y-G10 100 79 24 ø44 55 M26 x 1.5 24 31 22 32 +0.3 64 72 IY-G10 L2 ∗ Knuckle pin and retaining ring are shipped together. Material: Carbon steel (mm) Applicable Applicable Pivot Bracket (Order separately) Part no. Dd9 L d L2 m t bore (mm) retaining ring –0.040 IY-G02 20 8 –0.076 21 7.6 16.2 1.5 0.9 Type C 8 for axis ø20 to ø63 –0.040 IY-G03 25, 32 10 –0.076 25.6 9.6 20.2 1.55 1.15 Type C 10 for axis Material: –0.040 ø IY-G04 40 10 –0.076 41.6 9.6 36.2 1.55 1.15 Type C 10 for axis Rolled steel –0.050 IY-G05 50, 63 14 –0.093 50.6 13.4 44.2 2.05 1.15 Type C 14 for axis –0.050 IY-G08 80 18 –0.093 64 17 56.2 2.55 1.35 Type C 18 for axis –0.065 IY-G10 100 22 –0.117 72 21 64.2 2.55 1.35 Type C 22 for axis ∗ Retaining rings are shipped together. ø . Knock pin hole
Clevis Pin x ø REA ø ø ø80, ø100 L2 Material: Cast iron REB ø ø Material: Carbon steel (mm) REC Applicable Applicable Part no. Dd9 L d L2 m t bore (mm) retaining ring –0.040 CD-G02 20 8 –0.076 43.4 7.6 38.6 1.5 0.9 Type C 8 for axis CY –0.040 CD-G25 25 10 –0.076 48 9.6 42.6 1.55 1.15 Type C 10 for axis –0.050 CD-G03 32 12 –0.093 59.4 11.5 54 1.55 1.15 Type C 12 for axis –0.050 C X CD-G04 40 14 –0.093 71.4 13.4 65 2.05 1.15 Type C 14 for axis –0.050 ø CD-G05 50 16 –0.093 86 15.2 79.6 2.05 1.15 Type C 16 for axis x –0.050 CD-G06 63 18 –0.093 105.4 17 97.8 2.45 1.35 Type C 18 for axis MQ Retaining rings are shipped together. ∗ (mm) ∗ Clevis pin and knuckle pin are common for bore size ø80 and ø100. Applicable Part no. TB Td TE TF TH TN TR TT RHC bore (mm) Rod End Nut CG-020-24A 20 36 8 10 5.5 25 (29.3) 13 3.2 CG-025-24A 25 43 10 10 5.5 30 (33.1) 15 3.2 RZQ CG-032-24A 32 50 12 10 6.6 35 (40.4) 17 4.5 CG-040-24A 40 58 14 10 6.6 40 (49.2) 21 4.5 CG-050-24A 50 70 16 20 9 50 (60.4) 24 6 CG-063-24A 63 82 18 20 11 60 (74.6) 26 8 –01 ø CG-080-24A 80 73 18 — 11 55 28 –03 36 11 –01 CG-100-24A 100 90 22 — 13.5 65 32 –03 50 12 Applicable Applicable Part no. TU TV TW TX TY TZ Material: Rolled steel (mm) bore (mm) pin O.D. –0.040 Applicable CG-020-24A 20 (18.1) (35.8) 42 16 28 38.3 8d9 –0.076 Part no. d H1 B1 C D bore (mm) –0.040 CG-025-24A 25 (20.7) (39.8) 42 20 28 42.1 10d9 –0.076 NT-02 20 M8 x 1.25 5 13 (15) 12.5 –0.050 CG-032-24A 32 (23.6) (49.4) 48 22 28 53.8 12d9 –0.093 NT-03 25, 32 M10 x 1.25 6 17 (19.6) 16.5 –0.050 CG-040-24A 40 (27.3) (58.4) 56 30 30 64.6 14d9 –0.093 NT-G04 40 M14 x 1.5 8 19 (21.9) 18 –0.050 CG-050-24A 50 (29.7) (72.4) 64 36 36 79.2 16d9 –0.093 D- NT-05 50, 63 M18 x 1.5 11 27 (31.2) 26 –0.050 CG-063-24A 63 (34.3) (90.4) 74 46 46 97.2 18d9 –0.093 NT-08 80 M22 x 1.5 13 32 (37.0) 31 –0.050 CG-080-24A 80 — — 72 85 45 110 18d9 –0.093 NT-10 100 M26 x 1.5 16 41 (47.3) 39 –0.065 -X CG-100-24A 100 — — 93 100 60 130 22d9 –0.117 1209 Series CG1Y Auto Switch Mounting 1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height Reed auto switch Solid state auto switch D-A9 D-M9 ø20 to ø63 D-M9W ø20 to ø63 ≅Hs ≅Hs 16 16
A 24.5 B A 22 B (22) (24) ( ): Values for D-A96 ( ): Values for D-M9A A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch. A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch. D-C7, C8 D-G5, K5, G5W ø20 to ø63 D-K59W, D-G59F, D-G5NT Hs Auto switch ø20 to ø100 Auto switch ≅ 8.5 ≅Hs 12 16 24.5
A 26 B A 33 B D-C73C, C80C D-H7, H7W ø20 to ø63 Auto switch D-H7NF Auto switch ≅Hs 8.5 ø20 to ø63 8.5 ≅Hs 16 16
36.7 A B A 29 B D-B5, B6, B59W D-H7C ø20 to ø100 Auto switch ø20 to ø63 ≅Hs 12 ≅Hs 8.5 Auto switch 16 24.5
A 33 B A 38.2 B
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto switch Auto switch D-G5W D-M9 model D-H7 model D-M9 (V) D-M9W D-B5/B6 D-K59W D-M9 (V) D-C7/C8 D-K59W D-M9A D-B5 D-H7C D-G59F D-M9W (V) D-C73C D-B59W D-G5NT D-A9 (V) D-M9W (V) D-C73C D-B59W D-A9 D-B6 D-H7W D-G5 D-M9A (V) D-H7 D-C80C D-G5/K5 D-G59F D-M9A (V) D-C80C D-H7NF D-K5 D-A9 (V) D-H7W D-G5W D-H7C D-G5NT D-H7NF Bore size Bore size D-C7/C8 (mm) A B A B A B A B A B AABB (mm) Hs Hs Hs Hs 20 29 28 33 32 29.5 28.5 23.5 22.5 26.5 25.5 28.5 27.5 25 24 20 25.5 24.5 27 27.5
25 29 28 33 32 29.5 28.5 23.5 22.5 26.5 25.5 28.5 27.5 25 24 25 28 27 29.5 30
32 30 29 34 33 30.5 29.5 24.5 23.5 27.5 26.5 29.5 28.5 26 25 32 31.5 30.5 33 33.5
40 35 32 39 36 35.5 32.5 29.5 26.5 32 29.5 34.5 31.5 31 28 40 36 35 37.5 38
50 42 40 46 44 42.5 40.5 36.5 34.5 39.5 37.5 41.5 39.5 38 36 50 41.5 40.5 43 43.5
63 42 40 46 44 42.5 40.5 36.5 34.5 39.5 37.5 41.5 39.5 38 36 63 48.5 47.5 50 50.5
80 — — — — — — 46.5 44.5 49.5 47.5 — — 48 46 80 — — — 59
100 — — — — — — 46.5 44.5 49.5 47.5 — — 48 46 100 — — — 69.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting. 1210 Auto Switch Mounting Series CG1Y
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm) No. of auto switch mounted Auto switch model 2 pcs. n pcs. 1 pc. Different surfaces Same surface Different surfaces Same surface (n-2) 20 + 35 55 + 35(n-2) D-M9 5 15 Note 1) 40 Note 1) 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 35 55 + 35(n-2) D-M9W 10 15 Note 1) 40 Note 1) 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 25 + 35 60 + 35(n-2) D-M9A 10 25 40 Note 1) 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 15 + 35 50 + 35(n-2) D-A9 5 15 30 Note 1) 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 35 35 + 35(n-2) D-M9V 5 20 35 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 15 + 35 25 + 35(n-2) D-A9V 5 15 25 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-M9WV 20 + 35 35 + 35(n-2) 10 20 35 2 D-M9AV (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-C7 15 + 45 50 + 45(n-2) 10 15 50 2 D-C80 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-H7 15 + 45 60 + 45(n-2) D-H7W 10 15 60 2 D-H7NF (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-C73C 15 + 50 65 + 50(n-2) 10 15 65 2 D-C80C (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···)
D-B5 (n-2) D-B64 15 + 50 75 + 55(n-2) 10 15 75 2 D-G5 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) D-K59 (n-2) 20 + 50 75 + 55(n-2) D-B59W 15 20 75 2 (n=2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n=2, 3, 4, 5···) Note 3) When "n" is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. REA Note 1) Auto switch mounting With 2 auto switches REB Different surfaces Same surface REC A 15 3.5 CY CX Auto switch model MQ RHC B RZQ The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a direction Correct auto switch mounting position is 3.5 mm from the back (cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the auto switch and face of the switch holder. lead wire do not interfere with each other. D-M9 Less than 20 stroke Note 2) Less than 55 stroke Note 2) D-M9W D-M9A Less than 20 stroke Note 2) Less than 60 stroke Note 2) D-A9 — Less than 50 stroke Note 2) Note 2) Minimum stroke for mounting auto switches in the other mounting styles mentioned in note 1.
D- -X 1211 Series CG1Y Auto Switch Mounting 2
Operating Range (mm) Bore size Auto switch model 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 D-A9 (V) 7 6 8 8 8 9 — — D-M9 (V) D-M9W (V) 4.5 5 4.5 5.5 5 5.5 — — D-M9A (V) D-C7/C80 8 10 9 10 10 11 — — D-C73C/C80C D-B5/B64 8 10 9 10 10 11 11 11 D-B59W 13 13 14 14 14 17 16 18 / m D-H7 H7 W 4 4 4.5 5 6 6.5 — — D-H7NF D-H7C 7 8.5 9 10 9.5 10.5 — — D-G5/G5W/G59F 4 4 4.5 5 6 6.5 6.5 7 D-G5BA/K59/K59W D-G5NT 4 4 4.5 5 6 6.5 6.5 7 D-G5NB 35 40 40 45 45 45 45 50 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment. Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm) Auto switch model 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
D-M9 (V) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) D-M9W (V) BMA3-020 BMA3-025 BMA3-032 BMA3-040 BMA3-050 BMA3-063 — — D-A9 (V) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) D-M9A (V) BMA3-020S BMA3-025S BMA3-032S BMA3-040S BMA3-050S BMA3-063S — — D-C7/C80 D-C73C D-C80C BMA2-020A BMA2-025A BMA2-032A BMA2-040A BMA2-050A BMA2-063A — — D-H7 D-H7W D-H7NF D-B5/B64 D-B59W D-G5/K59 D-G5W/K59W BA-01 BA-02 BA-32 BA-04 BA-05 BA-06 BA-08 BA-10 D-G59F D-G5NT D-G5NB Note 1) Set part number which includes the auto switch mounting band (BMA2-A) and the holder kit (BJ5-1/Switch bracket: Transparent). Since the switch bracket (made from nylon) is affected in an environment where alcohol, chloroform, methylamines, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid is splashed over, so it cannot be used. Please consult SMC regarding other chemicals. Note 2) Set part number which includes the auto switch mounting band (BMA2-AS) and the holder kit (BJ4-1/Switch bracket: White). Note 3) For the D-M9 A (V) type auto switch, do not install the switch bracket on the indicator light. [Stainless Steel Mounting Screw Kit] The following set of stainless steel mounting screws is available. Use them in accordance a with the operating environment. Switch bracket (Since auto switch brackets are not included, order them separately.) Auto switch BBA3: For D-B5/B6/G5/K5 types BBA4: For D-C7/C80/H7 types Note 4) Refer to page 1989 for the details of BBA3 screws. The above stainless steel screws are used when a cylinder is shipped with D-H7BA type and G5BA type auto switches. When only a switch is shipped independently, BBA3 screws or BBA4 screws are b attached respectively. Switch holder
qBJ-1: A set of a and b in the figure. BJ4-1 (Switch bracket: White) BJ5-1 (Switch bracket: Transparent) wBM2-A (S) : A set of c and d in the d figure. Auto switch Band (c) is mounted so that the projected part mounting screw is on the internal side (contact side with the c tube). Auto switch mounting band 1212 Auto Switch Mounting Series CG1Y
Cylinder Bracket by Stroke/Auto Switch Mounting Surface
Auto switch mounting surface varies depending on mounting brackets and cylinder strokes. Refer to the table below. (mm) Basic style, Foot style, Flange style, Clevis style Trunnion style No. of auto switches 1 2 2 1 2 2 (Rod cover side) (Different surfaces) (Same surface) (Rod cover side) (Different surfaces) (Same surface) Switch mounting surface Port surface Port surface Port surface
Switch type D-M9 (V) D-M9W (V) 10 st or more 15 to 44st 45 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 44 st 45 st or more D-M9A (V) D-A9 (V) D-C7/C8 10 st or more 15 to 49st 50 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 49 st 50 st or more D-H7/H7W 10 st or more 15 to 59st 60 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 59 st 60 st or more D-H7NF D-C73C/C80C/H7C 10 st or more 15 to 64st 65 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 64 st 65 st or more D-B5/B6/G5/K5 D-G5W/K59W 10 st or more 15 to 74st 75 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 74 st 75 st or more D-G59F/G5NT D-B59W 15 st or more 20 to 74st 75 st or more 15 st or more 20 to 74 st 75 st or more ∗ Trunnion style is not available for bore sizes ø80 and ø100.
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features Applicable bore size D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B — D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) ø20 to ø63 Solid state D-H7BA Water resistant (2-color indication) D-G5NT Grommet (In-line) With timer ø20 to ø100 D-C73, C76 — ø20 to ø63 Reed D-C80 Without indicator light D-B53 — ø20 to ø100 REA ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 to 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911. REB ∗ Wide range detection type, solid state auto switches (D-G5NB type) are also available. Refer to page 1953 for details. REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1213 Smooth Cylinder Series CA2Y ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
How to Order CA2Y L 40 150
With auto switch CDA2Y L 40 150 M9BW With auto switch Made to Order (Built-in magnet) For details, refer to page Mounting style 1215. B Basic style Number of auto switches L Axial foot style Nil 2 pcs. F Rod side flange style S 1 pc. G Head side flange style 3 3 pcs. C Single clevis style n n pcs. D Double clevis style Auto switch Center trunnion style T Cylinder stroke (mm) Nil Without auto switch Refer to "Standard Stroke" Bore size ∗ For the applicable auto on page 1215. Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 40 40 mm switch model, refer to the If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto 50 50 mm Thread type table below. switch is required, there is no need to enter 63 63 mm Nil Rc the symbol for the auto switch. 80 80 mm TN NPT (Example) CDA2YB40-100 100 100 mm TF G Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function Band 0.5 1 Applicable load entry Tie-rod 3 5 connector (Output) DC AC (Nil) Indicator light Indicator mounting mounting (M) (L) (Z) M9N — 3-wire (NPN) — G59 — 5 V, 12 V IC circuit M9P — 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — Grommet — G5P — — M9B — 12 V 2-wire — K59 — — — — 100 V, 200 V J51 — — — Terminal 3-wire (NPN) G39C G39 — — — — — 12 V conduit 2-wire K39C K39 — — — — — M9NW — 3-wire (NPN) Relay, Ye s — G59W — IC circuit 5 V, 12 V PLC M9PW — Diagnostic indication (2-color) 3-wire (PNP) — G5PW — M9BW — 2-wire 24 V 12 V — — — K59W — Solid state auto switch Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NA∗∗∗ — 5V,12V IC circuit Water resistant (2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) M9PA∗∗∗ — 2-wire 12V M9PA∗∗∗ — — With diagnostic output (2-color) 4-wire(NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F G59F — IC circuit Magnetic field resistant 2-wire P3DW — — — — (2-color) (Non-polar) P4DW — — — 3-wire — 5 V ∗∗ — — Ye s (Equiv. NPN) — A96 — — — IC circuit 100 V ∗∗ — — — Grommet A93 — No 100 V or less A90∗∗ — — — — IC circuit Relay, — Ye s 100 V, 200 V A54 B54 — — PLC No 12 V 200 V or less A64 B64 — — — 2-wire 24 V Terminal — A33C A33 — — — — — conduit A34C A34 — — — — — — PLC Ye s 100 V, 200 V Reed auto switch DIN terminal A44C A44 — — — — — Relay, Diagnostic indication (2-color) Grommet — — A59W B59W — — — PLC ∗∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ : Manufactured upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗∗ D-A9/A9V types cannot be mounted on ø50. 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1228. ∗ Refer to pages 1960 and 1961 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector. For D-P3DW, refer to pages 1948 and 1949. ∗ D-A9/M9/P3DW auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped for D-A9 and M9.) 1214 Smooth Cylinder Series CA2Y
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63 80 100 Action Double acting Operating piston speed 5 to 500 mm/s Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa Ambient and Without auto switch –10 to 70°C (with no freezing) fluid temperature With auto switch –10 to 60°C (with no freezing) Cushion None Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) Basic, Axial foot, Front flange, Mounting Rear flange, Single clevis, Double clevis Center trunnion Allowable leakage rate 0.5 L/min (ANR)
Symbol Minimum Operating Pressure Without cushion Unit: MPa Bore size (mm) 40 50 63 80 100 Minimum operating pressure 0.02 0.01
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Made to Order 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 40 (For details, refer to pages 2009 to 2152.) 450, 500 Symbol Specifications 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 50, 63 -XA Change of rod end shape 450, 500, 600 -XC6 Made of stainless steel 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 80, 100 Tie-rod, cushion valve and tie-rod 450, 500, 600, 700 -XC7 nut made of stainless steel Note 1) Intermediate strokes not listed above are also available. -XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/adjustable retraction type Please consult with SMC for strokes outside the above ranges. -XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position Note 2) As the stroke increases, more sliding resistance may result due to the deflection of the piston rod and other factors. Take measures such as the installation of a guide. -XC15 Change of tie-rod length -XC27 Double clevis and double knuckle joint pins made of stainless steel Accessory REA -XC28 Compact flange made of SS400 Double knuckle joint with spring pin Front Rear Single Double Center REB -XC29 Mounting Basic Foot -XC30 Rod side trunnion flange flange clevis clevis trunnion -XC6 + -XC7 Rod end nut REC -XC65 Standard Clevis pin — — — — — — Single knuckle joint CY Option Double knuckle joint Replacement Parts: Seal Kit (with pin) CX
Bore size Kit no. Contents MQ (mm) 40 CA2Y40-PS Rod seal 1 pc. RHC 50 CA2Y50-PS Piston seal 1 pc. 63 CA2Y63-PS Cylinder tube gasket 2 pcs. RZQ 80 CA2Y80-PS Grease pack (10 g) 1 pc. 100 CA2Y100-PS When only grease for maintenance is necessary, please order by the following part numbers. Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g) GR-L-010 (10 g) GR-L-150 (150 g)
D- -X 1215 Series CA2Y
Weight (kg) Bore size (mm) 40 50 63 80 100 Basic style 0.89 1.36 2.00 3.48 4.87 Axial foot style 1.08 1.58 2.34 4.15 5.86 Basic Flange style 1.26 1.81 2.79 4.93 6.79 weight Single clevis style 1.12 1.70 2.63 4.59 6.65 Double clevis style 1.16 1.79 2.79 4.88 7.17 Trunnion style 1.25 1.84 2.80 5.03 7.15 Additional weight per each 50 mm of stroke 0.22 0.28 0.37 0.52 0.65 Single knuckle 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.60 0.83 Accessory Double knuckle (With pin) 0.37 0.43 0.43 0.87 1.27 Calculation: (Example) CA2YL40-100/Axial foot • Basic weight···············1.08 kg • Additional weight········0.22/50 stroke • Cylinder stroke···········100 stroke 1.08 + 0.22 x 100/50 = 1.52 kg
Low Friction Cylinder Mounting (Accessory)
CDA2Y Mounting style Bore size Stroke X1854
Same mounting specification as CDA2Q
In order to adjust the mounting dimensions of the low friction cylinder (CDA2Q), extend the longitudinal dimension (S, ZZ) by 10 mm. ∗ Cylinders without a built-in magnet can be interchangeable.
Dimensions
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Bore size (mm) S ZZ 40 94 156 50 100 169 63 108 180 80 126 214 100 136 225
∗ Add 10 mm to S and ZZ dimensions of the double acting, single rod type on pages 1217 to 1221 for the dimensions for each mounting bracket other than the basic style.
1216 Smooth Cylinder Series CA2Y
Dimensions: ø40 to ø100
2 x P Basic style: CA2YB 4 x J (Rc, NPT, G) Width across flats KA G G MM ø E ø D
H1 AL B1 A K F N N C H S + Stroke M B ZZ + Stroke
(mm) Bore size Stroke (mm) range A AL B B1 C D E F G H H1 J K KA M MM N P S ZZ 40 Up to 500 30 27 60 22 44 16 32 10 15 51 8 M8 x 1.25 6 14 11 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 146 50 Up to 600 35 32 70 27 52 20 40 10 17 58 11 M8 x 1.25 7 18 11 M18 x 1.5 30 3/8 90 159 63 Up to 600 35 32 85 27 64 20 40 10 17 58 11 M10 x 1.25 7 18 14 M18 x 1.5 31 3/8 98 170 80 Up to 700 40 37 102 32 78 25 52 14 21 71 13 M12 x 1.75 10 22 17 M22 x 1.5 37 1/2 116 204 100 Up to 700 40 37 116 41 92 30 52 14 21 72 16 M12 x 1.75 10 26 17 M26 x 1.5 40 1/2 126 215
Axial foot: CA2YL
H 2 x P B1 4 x J A K F G (Rc, NPT, G) G AL Width across flats KA ø E ø D LY 4 x øLD REA
LH MM H1
LT REB N N LX Y X S + Stroke X Y REC C LS + Stroke B ZZ + Stroke CY CX (mm) Bore size MQ (mm) A AL B B1 C D E F G H1 J K KA LD LH LS LT LX LY 40 30 27 60 22 44 16 32 10 15 8 M8 x 1.25 6 14 9.0 40 138 3.2 42 70 RHC 50 35 32 70 27 52 20 40 10 17 11 M8 x 1.25 7 18 9.0 45 144 3.2 50 80 63 35 32 85 27 64 20 40 10 17 11 M10 x 1.25 7 18 11.5 50 166 3.2 59 93 RZQ 80 40 37 102 32 78 25 52 14 21 13 M12 x 1.75 10 22 13.5 65 204 4.5 76 116 100 40 37 116 41 92 30 52 14 21 16 M12 x 1.75 10 26 13.5 75 212 6.0 92 133
Bore size (mm) MM N P S X Y H ZZ 40 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 27 13 51 175 50 M18 x 1.5 30 3/8 90 27 13 58 188 63 M18 x 1.5 31 3/8 98 34 16 58 206 80 M22 x 1.5 37 1/2 116 44 16 71 247 100 M26 x 1.5 40 1/2 126 43 17 72 258 D- -X 1217 Series CA2Y
Rod Side Flange Style: CA2YF
4 x øFD 2 x P 4 x J (Rc, NPT, G) Width across flats KA G G MM
øE B FV FY ø D
Width across flats B1 H1 AL A K FT N N C H S + Stroke M B ZZ + Stroke FX FZ (mm) Bore size A AL FB B B1 C D E FV FD FT FX FY FZ G H1 J K KA M MM (mm) 40 30 27 71 60 22 44 16 32 60 9.0 12 80 42 100 15 8 M8 x 1.25 6 14 11 M14 x 1.5 50 35 32 81 70 27 52 20 40 70 9.0 12 90 50 110 17 11 M8 x 1.25 7 18 11 M18 x 1.5 63 35 32 101 85 27 64 20 40 86 11.5 15 105 59 130 17 11 M10 x 1.25 7 18 14 M18 x 1.5 80 40 37 119 102 32 78 25 52 102 13.5 18 130 76 160 21 13 M12 x 1.75 10 22 17 M22 x 1.5 100 40 37 133 116 41 92 30 52 116 13.5 18 150 92 180 21 16 M12 x 1.75 10 26 17 M26 x 1.5
Bore size N P S H ZZ (mm) 40 27 1/4 84 51 146 50 30 3/8 90 58 159 63 31 3/8 98 58 170 80 37 1/2 116 71 204 100 40 1/2 126 72 215
Head Side Flange Style: CA2YG
4 x øFD B1 4 x J 2 x P (Rc, NPT, G) Width across flats KA G G MM B FV FY ø E ø D
H1 AL C A K F N N B H S + Stroke FT FX ZZ + Stroke FZ (mm) Bore size A AL FB B B1 C D E F FV FD FT FX FY FZ G H1 J K KA (mm) 40 30 27 71 60 22 44 16 32 10 60 9.0 12 80 42 100 15 8 M8 x 1.25 6 14 50 35 32 81 70 27 52 20 40 10 70 9.0 12 90 50 110 17 11 M8 x 1.25 7 18 63 35 32 101 85 27 64 20 40 10 86 11.5 15 105 59 130 17 11 M10 x 1.25 7 18 80 40 37 119 102 32 78 25 52 14 102 13.5 18 130 76 160 21 13 M12 x 1.75 10 22 100 40 37 133 116 41 92 30 52 14 116 13.5 18 150 92 180 21 16 M12 x 1.75 10 26
Bore size MM N P S H ZZ (mm) 40 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 51 147 50 M18 x 1.5 30 3/8 90 58 160 63 M18 x 1.5 31 3/8 98 58 171 80 M22 x 1.5 37 1/2 116 71 205 100 M26 x 1.5 40 1/2 126 72 216 1218 Smooth Cylinder Series CA2Y
Single Clevis Style: CA2YC
2 x P 4 x J Width across flats KA G (Rc, NPT, G) G øCDH10 MM ø E ø D
Width across flats B1 H1 AL A K F N N U CX H S + Stroke L C Z + Stroke RR B ZZ + Stroke (mm)
Bore size H10 A AL B B1 C CD CX D E F G H1 J K KA L MM (mm) +0.058 –0.1 40 30 27 60 22 44 10 0 15.0 –0.3 16 32 10 15 8 M8 x 1.25 6 14 30 M14 x 1.5 +0.070 –0.1 50 35 32 70 27 52 12 0 18.0 –0.3 20 40 10 17 11 M8 x 1.25 7 18 35 M18 x 1.5 +0.070 –0.1 63 35 32 85 27 64 16 0 25.0 –0.3 20 40 10 17 11 M10 x 1.25 7 18 40 M18 x 1.5 +0.084 –0.1 80 40 37 102 32 78 20 0 31.5 –0.3 25 52 14 21 13 M12 x 1.75 10 22 48 M22 x 1.5 +0.084 –0.1 100 40 37 116 41 92 25 0 35.5 –0.3 30 52 14 21 16 M12 x 1.75 10 26 58 M26 x 1.5
Bore size N P RR S U H Z ZZ (mm) 40 27 1/4 10 84 16 51 165 175 50 30 3/8 12 90 19 58 183 195 63 31 3/8 16 98 23 58 196 212 80 37 1/2 20 116 28 71 235 255 100 40 1/2 25 126 36 72 256 281 Double Clevis Style: CA2YD
2 x P Hole dia.: øCDH10 4 x J Width across flats KA G (Rc, NPT, G) G Rod dia.: øCDd9 MM REA REB ø E ø D REC
Width across flats B1 H1 AL CY A K F N N U CX H S + Stroke L CZ CX Z + Stroke RR C ZZ + Stroke B MQ ∗ Double clevis pins, double knuckle pins and retaining rings are shipped together. (mm) Bore size RHC (mm) A AL B B1 C CD CX CZ D E F G H1 J K KA L MM
+0.058 +0.3 40 30 27 60 22 44 10 0 15.0 +0.1 29.5 16 32 10 15 8 M8 x 1.25 6 14 30 M14 x 1.5 RZQ +0.070 +0.3 50 35 32 70 27 52 12 0 18.0 +0.1 38 20 40 10 17 11 M8 x 1.25 7 18 35 M18 x 1.5 +0.070 +0.3 63 35 32 85 27 64 16 0 25.0 +0.1 49 20 40 10 17 11 M10 x 1.25 7 18 40 M18 x 1.5 +0.084 +0.3 80 40 37 102 32 78 20 0 31.5 +0.1 61 25 52 14 21 13 M12 x 1.75 10 22 48 M22 x 1.5 +0.084 +0.3 100 40 37 116 41 92 25 0 35.5 +0.1 64 30 52 14 21 16 M12 x 1.75 10 26 58 M26 x 1.5
Bore size N P RR S U H Z ZZ (mm) 40 27 1/4 10 84 16 51 165 175 50 30 3/8 12 90 19 58 183 195 63 31 3/8 16 98 23 58 196 212 D- 80 37 1/2 20 116 28 71 235 255 100 40 1/2 25 126 36 72 256 281 -X ∗ Clevis pins, flat washers and cotter pins are included. 1219 Series CA2Y
Center Trunnion Style: CA2YT
Z + 1/2 Stroke 2 x P 4 x J Width across flats KA G (Rc, NPT, G) G MM e8 TY ø E ø D ø TD
H1 B1 AL C A K F N TT N B H S + Stroke TX ZZ + Stroke TZ
(mm) Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 C D E F G H1 J K KA MM N P S TDe8
–0.032 40 30 27 60 22 44 16 32 10 15 8 M8 x 1.25 6 14 M14 x 1.5 27 1/4 84 15–0.059 –0.032 50 35 32 70 27 52 20 40 10 17 11 M8 x 1.25 7 18 M18 x 1.5 30 3/8 90 15–0.059 –0.032 63 35 32 85 27 64 20 40 10 17 11 M10 x 1.25 7 18 M18 x 1.5 31 3/8 98 18–0.059 –0.040 80 40 37 102 32 78 25 52 14 21 13 M12 x 1.75 10 22 M22 x 1.5 37 1/2 116 25–0.073 –0.040 100 40 37 116 41 92 30 52 14 21 16 M12 x 1.75 10 26 M26 x 1.5 40 1/2 126 25–0.073
Bore size TT TX TY TZ H Z ZZ (mm) 40 22 85 62 117 51 93 140 50 22 95 74 127 58 103 154 63 28 110 90 148 58 107 162 80 34 140 110 192 71 129 194 100 40 162 130 214 72 135 206 ∗ Do not disassemble the trunnion style. It is extremely difficult to align the axial center of the trunnion with the axial center of the cylinder. Thus, if this style of cylinder is disassembled and reassembled, it is likely that the required dimensional accuracy cannot be attained, which may cause malfunction.
1220 Smooth Cylinder Series CA2Y
Trunnion and Double Clevis Mounting Bracket
• Strength is the same as cylinder brackets.
Bore size Description 40 50 63 80 100 Trunnion mounting bracket CA2-S04 CA2-S06 MB-S10 Double clevis bracket CA2-B04 CA2-B05 CA2-B06 CA2-B08 CA2-B10 Note) 1. The above brackets cannot be specified in the part number of the cylinder. 2. They must be ordered separately from the cylinder. 3. When the trunnion brackets are specified, two pieces should be ordered for each cylinder.
Trunnion bracket TE Z + 1/2 stroke Material: Cast iron TO TX TO ∗ This assembly drawing is provided as a reference. The trunnion bracket must be ordered separately. TY 4 x øTT TF ø TD TH TS 4 x øTR TY TU TL TU TC TA
(mm) Bore size Part no. (mm) TA TL TU TC TX TE TO TR TT TS TH TF TY Z TD-H10 (Hole) +0.070 40 80 60 10 102 85 119 17 9 17 12 45 60 62 93 15 0 CA2-S04 +0.070 50 80 60 10 112 95 129 17 9 17 12 45 60 74 103 15 0 +0.070 CA2-S06 63 100 70 15 130 110 150 20 11 22 14 55 73 90 107 18 0 +0.084 80 120 90 15 166 140 192 26 13.5 24 17 75 100 110 129 25 0 MB-S10 +0.084 100 120 90 15 188 162 214 26 13.5 24 17 75 100 130 135 25 0
Z + stroke B Double clevis bracket DX Material: Cast iron REA DD REB
B REC
4 x øDT DF DH CY DS CX B° 4 x øDR 90° DU DL DU DO DC DO Rotation DA DE MQ Bore size (mm) A° B° A° + B° + 90° A° 40 RHC to 12° 60° 162° 100 RZQ Note) This assembly drawing is provided as a reference. The trunnion bracket must be ordered separately. (mm) Bore size Part no. (Hole) (mm) DA DL DU DC DX DE DO DR DT DS DH DF B Z DDH10 +0.058 CA2-B04 40 57 35 11 65 15 85 10 9 17 8 40 52 60 165 10 0 +0.070 CA2-B05 50 57 35 11 65 18 85 10 9 17 8 40 52 70 183 12 0 +0.070 CA2-B06 63 67 40 13.5 80 25 105 12.5 11 22 10 50 66 85 196 16 0 +0.084 CA2-B08 80 93 60 16.5 100 31.5 130 15 13.5 24 12 65 90 102 235 20 0 +0.084 CA2-B10 100 93 60 16.5 100 35.5 130 15 13.5 24 12 65 90 116 256 25 0 D- -X 1221 Series CA2Y Accessory Dimensions
Y Type Double Knuckle Joint
Material: Cast iron (mm) Rod dia. øNDH10 Cotter pin Applicable Hole dia. øNDd9 Flat washer Polished round Flat washer Part no. bore size A1 E1 D1 L1 MM RR1 U1 ND NX NZ L Cotter pin size size MM (mm)
+0.3 Y-04D 40 22 24 10 55 M14 x 1.5 13 25 12 16 +0.1 38 55.5 ø3 x 18l Polished round 12 1 E L NZ NX ø +0.3 Y-05D 50, 63 27 28 14 60 M18 x 1.5 15 27 12 16 +0.1 38 55.5 ø3 x 18l Polished round 12 1 D ø +0.3 Y-08D 80 37 36 18 71 M22 x 1.5 19 28 18 28 +0.1 55 76.5 ø4 x 25 Polished round 18 A1 U1 l L1 +0.3 1 Y-10D 100 37 40 21 83 M26 x 1.5 21 38 20 30 +0.1 61 83 ø4 x 30l Polished round 20 RR ∗ Knuckle pin, cotter pin and flat washer are included.
Clevis Pin/Knuckle Pin
Material: Carbon steel (mm) Applicable bore size (mm) d drill Applicable Applicable 2 x ød Part no. Dd9 L l m d9 Clevis Knuckle through cotter pin flat washer D
ø –0.040 CDP-2A 40 — 10 –0.076 46 38 4 3 ø3 x 18l Polished round 10
–0.050 CDP-3A 50 40, 50, 63 12 –0.093 55.5 47.5 4 3 ø3 x 18l Polished round 12
–0.050 m l CDP-4A 63 — 16 –0.093 71 61 5 4 ø4 x 25l Polished round 16 L –0.050 CDP-5A — 80 18 –0.093 76.5 66.5 5 4 ø4 x 25l Polished round 18
–0.065 CDP-6A 80 100 20 –0.117 83 73 5 4 ø4 x 30l Polished round 20
–0.065 CDP-7A 100 — 25 –0.117 88 78 5 4 ø4 x 36l Polished round 24 ∗ Cotter pin and flat washer are included.
I Type Single Knuckle Joint Rod End Nut (Standard option)
d NDH10
MM 1 R R 1 D C E ø ø
A1 U1 L1 H B A NX
Material: Free cutting sulfur steel (mm) Material: Rolled steel (mm) Applicable bore Applicable bore Part no. A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX Part no. d H B C D size (mm) size (mm) +0.070 –0.1 I-04A 40 69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 15.5 20 12 0 16 –0.3 NT-04 40 M14 x 1.5 8 22 25.4 21 +0.070 –0.1 I-05A 50, 63 74 27 28 60 M18 x 1.5 15.5 20 12 0 16 –0.3 NT-05 50, 63 M18 x 1.5 11 27 31.2 26 +0.070 –0.1 I-08A 80 91 37 36 71 M22 x 1.5 22.5 26 18 0 28 –0.3 NT-08 80 M22 x 1.5 13 32 37.0 31 +0.084 –0.1 I-10A 100 105 37 40 83 M26 x 1.5 24.5 28 20 0 30 –0.3 NT-10 100 M26 x 1.5 16 41 47.3 39
1222 Series CA2Y Auto Switch Mounting 1 Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
20 B D-A5/A6 D-A3 D-A59W Auto switch ≅Hs D-G39/K39
(Applicable cable O.D.) Ht G 1/2 ≅Hs ≅ ø6.8 to ø9.6 Ht ≅
Auto switch D-A3C
D-G39C/K39C (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø9.6) D-G5/K59 D-G5W/K59W D-G59F/G5NT Hs ≅
Auto switch ≅Hs
D-F5/J5 D-F5NT D-F5W/J59W D-F59F Auto switch ≅Hs D-A44 REA Ht ≅ Ht
≅ REB
≅Hs REC G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D.) ø6.8 to ø11.5 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø11.5) D-A44C Auto switch CY C X Auto switch Hs ≅ MQ RHC RZQ D-P3DW A ≅Hs ≅ Ht
B
D-P4DW Auto switch ≅Hs Ht ≅ D- Ht ≅ A 32 B -X 1223 Series CA2Y Auto Switch Mounting 2
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto switch D-B59W D-A5 D-M9 D-Z7 D-A6 D-G5 model D-F5 Note 2) D-M9V D-Z80 D-A3 D-K59 D-Y59 D-A3C D-J5 D-A9 D-M9W D-A44 D-B5 D-G5NT D-Y69 D-P3DW D-P4DW D-F59F D-A59W D-F5NT D-A9V D-M9WV D-A44C D-B64 D-G5W D-Y7P D-G39 D-F5W D-M9A D-Y7PV D-K59W D-G39C D-J59W D-M9AV D-Y7W D-K39 D-G59F D-Y7WV D-K39C Bore size A B A B A B AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB 40 6 4 10 8 3.5 1.5 6 3 3 1 0 0 0.5 0 6.5 4.5 2 0 4 2 11.5 9.5 50 — — 10 8 3.5 1.5 5.5 3.5 3 1 0 0 0.5 0 6.5 4.5 2 0 4 2 11.5 9.5 63 8.5 7.5 12.5 11.5 6 5 3 1.5 5.5 4 2.5 1.5 3 2 9 8 4.5 3.5 6.5 5.5 14 13 80 12 10 16 14 9.5 7.5 6 4.5 9 7 6 4 6.5 4.5 4.5 12.5 8 6 10 8 17.5 15.5 100 13.5 12.5 17.5 16.5 11 10 8 6.5 10.5 9 7.5 6.5 8 7 14 13 9.5 8.5 11.5 10.5 19 18 Note 1) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto switch D-B5 D-B64 D-F5 model Note 2) D-Z7 D-A9 D-B59W D-J59 D-M9V D-Z80 D-Y69 D-A3 D-A5 D-A3C D-M9 Note 2) D-G5 D-F5W D-A9V D-M9WV D-Y59 D-Y7PV D-P3DW D-P4DW D-K59 D-G39 D-A44 D-A6 D-G39C D-A44C D-M9W D-J59W D-M9AV D-Y7P D-Y7WV D-G5NT D-K39 D-A59W D-K39C D-M9A D-G5W D-F59F D-Y7W D-K59W D-F5NT D-G59F Bore size Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Hs Hs Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Hw Hs Hw 40 30 30 31 30 34 30 30 30 30 30 38 30 42.5 33 37 71.5 81.5 38.5 31.5 38 31.5 73 69 81 69 50 34 34 — — 38 34 34 34 34 34 42 34 46.5 37.5 42 76.5 86.5 42 35.5 42 35.5 78.5 77 86.5 77 63 41 41 41.5 41 44 41 41 41 41 41 49 41 52 43 49 83.5 93.5 46.5 43 47 43 85.5 91 93.5 91 80 49.5 49 50 49 52.5 49 49.5 49 49.5 49 56 49 58.5 51.5 57.5 92 102 53.5 51 53.5 51 94 107 102 107 100 56.5 56 58.5 56 61 56 56.5 55.5 57.5 55.5 65 56 66 58.5 68 102.5 112.5 61.5 57.5 61 57.5 104 121 112 121 Note 2) D-A9/A9V types cannot be mounted on ø50.
1224 Auto Switch Mounting Series CA2Y
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm) Auto switch Number of Brackets other than Center trunnion model auto switch center trunnion ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100 2 (Different surfaces and 15 75 80 85 90 same surface) With 1 D-A9 (n – 2) (n – 4) — (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 40 75 + 40 80 + 40 85 + 40 90 + 40 n 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces and 10 50 55 60 65 same surface) With 1 D-A9V (n – 2) (n – 4) — (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 10 + 30 50 + 30 55 + 30 60 + 30 65 + 30 n 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces and 15 80 85 90 95 D-M9 same surface) With 1 D-M9W (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 40 80 + 40 85 + 40 90 + 40 95 + 40 D-M9A n 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces and 10 55 60 65 70 D-M9V same surface) With 1 D-M9WV (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 10 + 30 55 + 30 60 + 30 65 + 30 70 + 30 D-M9AV n 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces and D-A5 /A6 15 90 100 110 120 same surface) With 1 D-F5/J5 (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) D-F5W/J59W 15 + 55 90 + 55 100 + 55 110 + 55 120 + 55 n (Same surface) 2 2 2 2 2 D-F59F (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces 20 90 100 110 120 and same surface) (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) D-A59W 20 + 55 90 + 55 100 + 55 110 + 55 120 + 55 n (Same surface) 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 1 15 90 100 110 120 2 (Different surfaces and same surface) With 1 25 110 120 130 140 D-F5NT (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 25 + 55 110 + 55 120 + 55 130 + 55 140 + 55 n (Same surface) 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) With Different surfaces 15 90 100 110 D-B5/B64 2 Same surface 75 D-G5 /K59 (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 50 90 + 50 100 + 50 110 + 50 D-G5W Different surfaces 2 2 2 2 With Note 1) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) D-K59W (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16, ···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16, ···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) n 75 + 50(n – 2) 90 + 50(n – 2) 100 + 50 (n – 2) 110 + 50 (n – 2) REA D-G59F Same surface D-G5NT (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) 1 10 90 100 110 REB With Different surfaces 20 90 100 110 2 Same surface 75 (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) REC 20 + 50 90 + 50 100 + 50 110 + 50 Different surfaces 2 2 2 2 D-B59W With (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ····) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16, ···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16, ···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16, ···) Note 2) n CY 75 + 50 (n – 2) 90 + 50(n – 2) 100 + 50 (n – 2) 110 + 50 (n – 2) Same surface (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) 1 15 90 100 110 CX With Different surfaces 35 75 80 90 2 Same surface 100 100 100 100 MQ D-A3 35 + 30 (n – 2) 75 + 30 (n – 2) 80 + 30 (n – 2) 90 + 30 (n – 2) Different surfaces Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) D-G39 With (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) RHC 100 + 100 (n – 2) 100 + 100 (n – 2) D-K39 n Same surface (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) RZQ 1 10 75 80 90 With Different surfaces 35 75 80 90 2 Same surface 55 35 + 30 (n – 2) 75 + 30 (n – 2) 80 + 30 (n – 2) 90 + 30 (n – 2) Different surfaces Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) D-A44 With (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) 55 + 50 (n – 2) 75 + 50 (n – 2) 80 + 50 (n – 2) 90 + 50 (n – 2) n Same surface (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) 1 10 75 80 90 Note 1) When "n" is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. Note 2) When "n" is an odd number, a multiple of 4 that is larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. D- -X 1225 Series CA2Y Auto Switch Mounting 3
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm) Auto switch Number of Brackets other than Center trunnion model auto switch center trunnion ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100 With Different surfaces 20 75 80 90 2 Same surface 100 100 100 100 20 + 35 (n – 2) 75 + 35 (n – 2) 80 + 35 (n – 2) 90 + 35 (n – 2) D-A3C Different surfaces D-G39C With (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) D-K39C n 100 + 100 (n – 2) 100 + 100 (n – 2) Same surface (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) 1 10 75 80 90 With Different surfaces 20 75 80 90 2 Same surface 55 20 + 35 (n – 2) 75 + 35 (n – 2) 80 + 35 (n – 2) 90 + 35 (n – 2) Different surfaces D-A44C With (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) n 55 + 50 (n – 2) 75 + 50 (n – 2) 80 + 50 (n – 2) 90 + 50 (n – 2) Same surface (n = 2, 3, 4, ···) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) (n = 2, 4, 6, 8, ···) Note 1) 1 10 75 80 90 2 (Different surfaces and 15 80 85 90 95 105 D-Z7/Z80 same surface) With 1 D-Y59/Y7P (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 40 80 + 40 85 + 40 90 + 40 95 + 40 105 + 40 D-Y7W n 2 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces and 10 65 75 80 90 same surface) With 1 D-Y69/Y7PV (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) D-Y7WV 10 + 30 65 + 30 75 + 30 80 + 30 90 + 30 n 2 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces and 15 85 same surface) With 1 D-P3DW (n – 2) (n – 4) 15 + 50 85 + 50 n 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) 2 (Different surfaces and 15 120 130 140 same surface) With 1 D-P4DW (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 65 120 + 65 130 + 65 140 + 65 n 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) Note 1) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Note 2) Note 1) When "n" is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. Note 2) When "n" is an odd number, a multiple of 4 that is larger than this odd number is used for the calculation.
Operating Range
(mm) (mm) Bore size Bore size Auto switch model Auto switch model 40 50 63 80 100 40 50 63 80 100 D-A9/A9V 7 — 9 9 9 D-F5/J5/F5W D-M9/M9V D-J59W 4 4 4.5 4.5 4.5 D-M9W/M9WV 4.5 5 5.5 5 6 D-F5NT/F59F D-M9A/M9AV D-G5/K59/G5W D-Z7/Z80 8.5 7.5 9.5 9.5 10.5 D-K59W 5 6 6.5 6.5 7 D-A3/A44 D-G5NTL/G59F D-A3C/A44C D-G39/K39 9 10 11 11 11 9 9 10 10 11 D-A5/A6 D-G39C/K39C D-B5/B64 D-P3DW 4.5 5 6 5.5 6 D-A59W 13 13 14 14 15 D-P4DW 4 4 4.5 4 4.5 D-B59W 14 14 17 16 18 D-Y59/Y69 D-Y7P/Y7V 8 7 5.5 6.5 6.5 D-Y7W/Y7WV
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment. Note ) D-A9/A9V types cannot be mounted on ø50.
1226 Auto Switch Mounting Series CA2Y
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Part No.
D-Z7/Z80 D-Y59 /Y69 • Mounting example of D-A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V)/M9A(V) BA4-040 BA4-040 BA4-063 BA4-080 BA4-080 D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7W/Y7WV
D-P3DW BMB9-050S BMB9-050S BA9T-063S BA9T-080S BA9T-080S D-P4DW BAP2-040 BAP2-040 BAP2-063 BAP2-080 BAP2-080
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. REA For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features Applicable bore size REB D-A93V, A96V — ø40, ø63, Grommet (Perpendicular) D-A90V Without indicator light ø80, ø100 Reed REC D-A53, A56, B53, Z73, Z76 — Grommet (In-line) ø40 to ø100 D-A67, Z80 Without indicator light CY D-M9NV, M9PV, M9BV — D-Y69A, Y69B, Y7PV CX D-M9NWV, M9PWV, M9BWV Grommet (Perpendicular) Diagnostic indication D-Y7NWV, Y7PWV, Y7BWV (2-color indication) MQ D-M9NAV, M9PAV, M9BAV Water resistant (2-color indication) Solid state D-Y59A, Y59B, Y7P ø40 to ø100 — RHC D-F59, F5P, J59 D-Y7NW, Y7PW, Y7BW Diagnostic indication Grommet (In-line) RZQ D-F59W, F5PW, J59W (2-color indication) D-F5NTL, G5NT With timer D-P5DW Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H types) are also available. Refer to pages 1911 and 1913 for details. ∗ Wide range detection type, solid state auto switches (D-G5NB type) are also available. Refer to page 1953 for details.
D- -X 1227 Smooth Cylinder Series CS2Y ø125, ø140, ø160
How to Order
CS2 Y L 160 300 With auto switch CDS2 Y L 160 300 M9BW
With auto switch Number of auto switches (Built-in magnet) Nil 2 pcs. Smooth Cylinder S 1 pc. 3 3 pcs. Made to Order Mounting n “n” pcs. For details, refer to page 1229. B Basic Bore size L Foot Auto switch 125 mm F Rod flange 125 Nil Without auto switch 140 mm G Head flange 140 ∗ Refer to the table below for the 160 mm C Single clevis 160 applicable auto switch model. D Double clevis T Center trunnion Port thread type Suffix for cylinder Nil Rc J Nylon tarpaulin Rod boot TN NPT K Heat resistant tarpaulin Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model TF G A With double-side cushion If a built-in magnet cylinder without auto switch is With/without R With rod cushion required, there is no need to enter the symbol for Cylinder stroke (mm) cushihon H With head cushion auto switch. Refer to page 1229 for the Nil Without cushion (Example) CDS2YL125-200 “Maximum Stroke” table. ∗ When more than one symbol is specified, indicate them in alphabetical order. Applicable Auto Switches / For detailed auto switch specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function Tie-rod Band 0.5 1 3 5 Applicable load entry (Output) DC AC connector
Indicator light mounting mounting (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) 3-wire (NPN) M9N — 5 V, 12 V IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9P — Grommet 12 V M9B — — 2-wire — — — 100 V, 200 V J51 — Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39 IC circuit conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39 — Relay, Ye s 3-wire (NPN) M9NW — Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit PLC 3-wire (PNP) M9PW — (2-color indication) 2-wire 24 V 12 V — M9BW — — Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NA∗∗ —
Solid state auto switch 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Water resistant (2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) M9PA∗∗ — 2-wire 12 V M9BA∗∗ — — Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit 3-wire (NPN equivalent) — 5 V — A96 — IC circuit — Ye s 12 V 100 V A93 — — Grommet No 5 V, 12 V 100 V or less A90 — IC circuit Relay, Ye s 100 V, 200 V A54 — PLC — No 200 V or less A64 — 2-wire 24 V Terminal 12 V — — A33 PLC — conduit — A34
Reed auto switch Ye s 100 V, 200 V Relay, DIN terminal — A44 PLC Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — A59W — ∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order. 1 m ··········· M (Example) M9NWM 3 m ··········· L (Example) M9NWL 5 m ··········· Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ Since there are applicable auto switches other than listed, refer to page 1240 for details. ∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. ∗ D-A9, M9, M9W, M9A are shipped together (but not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting bracket is assembled at the time of shipment.) 1228 Smooth Cylinder Series CS2Y
Application Example Designed with a low sliding Low friction cylinder is used in combination with precision regulator (Series IR). resistance of the piston, this air cylinder is ideal for applica- Driving roller Winding roller tions such as contact pressure Precision regulator control, which requires smooth Precision regulator movements at low pressure. (Moving object) Low sliding resistance Min. operating pressure — 0.005 MPa Auto switch mounting is possible Specifications
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 Action Double acting, Single rod Direction of low friction Both directions Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa Minimum operating pressure 0.005 MPa∗ Without auto switch 0 to 70°C (No freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature With auto switch 0 to 60°C (No freezing) Allowable leakage Less than 0.5 L/min (ANR) Symbol Cushion Without cushion∗∗ (manufacturable with cushion) Double acting/Without cushion Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) Basic, Foot, Rod flange, Head flange, Mounting Single clevis, Double clevis, Center trunnion ∗ If a cushion is used, this value will not include the operating pressure within the cushion stroke. ∗ If an air cushion is not used, set the energy at the stroke end to 0.36J or less. REA Made to Order specifications (For details, refer to pages 2009 to 2152.) Maximum Stroke REB Symbol Specifications (mm) -XA Change of rod end shape Tube material Aluminum alloy Carbon steel tube REC -XC3 Special port position Mounting Change of trunnion bracket mounting position Basic, Head flange, -XC14 Basic, Head flange, CY bracket Single clevis, Double clevis, Foot, -XC15 Change of tie-rod length Single clevis, Double clevis, Center trunnion Rod flange Double clevis pin/Double knuckle pin with Bore size Center trunnion Rod flange CX -XC26 split pin and flat washer (mm) Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin 125 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less -XC27 made of stainless steel MQ 140 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less Rod side trunnion mounted on the front -XC30 of the rod cover 160 1200 or less 1200 or less 1600 or less RHC Made of stainless steel -XC68 (With hard chrome plated piston rod) RZQ -XC86 With rod end bracket Accessory
Rod Head Single Double Center For the specifications of cylinders with auto switch, Mounting Basic Foot flange flange clevis clevis trunnion please refer to pages 1238 to 1240. Standard • Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting equipment Clevis pin • Auto switch proper mounting position Rod end nut (detection at stroke end) and its mounting Single knuckle joint height Option Double knuckle joint • Operating range (Knuckle pin, Split pin) D- • Auto switch mounting bracket part no. Rod boot -X 1229 Series CS2Y
Mounting Bracket Part No. Rod Boot Material
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 Symbol Material Max. ambient temperature ∗ Foot CS2–L12 CS2–L14 CS2–L16 J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C Flange CS2–F12 CS2–F14 CS2–F16 K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C∗ Single clevis CS2–C12 CS2–C14 CS2–C16 ∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself. Double clevis∗∗ CS2–D12 CS2–D14 CS2–D16 ∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder. ∗∗ When ordering the double clevis style, the clevis pin and 2 split pins are included as accessories.
Weight
(kg) Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 Basic 5.46 6.50 9.07 Foot 7.49 9.50 12.45 Rod flange 8.51 12.03 15.80 Basic Head flange 8.51 12.03 15.80 weight Single clevis 8.53 10.79 14.56 Double clevis 8.99 11.54 15.41 Trunnion 9.59 12.23 15.47 Additional weight with magnet 0.07 0.07 0.08 (With built-in magnet and auto switch) Additional weight per each 100 mm of stroke 1.55 1.67 2.23 Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 Accessory Double knuckle (With 1.37 1.81 2.48 bracket Knuckle pin, Split pin) Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23 Calculation: (Example) CS2Y160-500 • Basic weight ························· 12.45 (kg) • Additional weight ·················· 2.23 (kg/100 mm) • Cylinder stroke ····················· 500 (mm) • 12.45 + 2.23 x 500/100 = 23.60 (kg)
Sliding Resistance
ø125 ø140 0.010 ø160
0.005 Sliding Resistance (MPa) (Converted into cylinder operating pressure)
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 Pressure (MPa)
1230 Smooth Cylinder Series CS2Y
Relation between Cylinder Size and Maximum Stroke
The below table shows the applicable maximum stroke (in cm units), found by calculation assuming the case where the force generated by the cylinder itself acts as buckling force on the piston rod, or piston rod and cylinder tube. Therefore, it is possible to find the applicable maximum stroke for each cylinder size using the relationship between the size of the operating pressure and the cylinder support type, regardless of the load ratio. [Reference] If it is stopped with the external stopper on the cylinder extension side, even with a light load, the maximum generated force of the cylinder will act on the cylinder itself. P
(cm)
Mounting Applicable max. stroke according to buckling strength (cm) Operating pressure Support bracket nominal symbol Nominal (MPa) 125 140 160 and schematic diagram symbol
Rod flange: Head flange: 0.3 103 92 113 Foot: L F G
W W W L, F 0.5 79 70 86
0.7 66 58 72
0.3 45 38 47
G 0.5 33 27 34
0.7 26 22 27
Center trunnion: 0.3 96 83 106 Clevis: C, D T C, D 0.5 71 61 76
W W 0.7 59 50 62
0.3 135 119 147
T 0.5 101 89 111
0.7 84 74 91
Rod flange: Head flange: 0.3 301 267 330 Foot: L F G REA L, F 0.5 231 207 253 W W W REB 0.7 193 172 212 REC 0.3 144 126 156 G 0.5 109 94 118 CY 0.7 90 78 97 CX Rod flange: Head flange: Foot: L 0.3 433 386 476 F G MQ W L, F 0.5 334 297 367 W W 0.7 281 250 309 RHC 0.3 210 185 229 RZQ G 0.5 160 141 175
0.7 134 117 129
D- -X 1231 Series CS2Y
Construction
!9 !5 !0 !6 y q u i !7 @0 t e o r !8 !4 !3 @1 !2 w !1
Component Parts Replacement Parts: Seal kit. No. Description Material Note Bore size (mm) Kit no. Content 1 Rod cover Aluminum die-cast Chromated 125 CS2Y125A-PS Without cushion 2 Head cover Aluminum die-cast Chromated 140 CS2Y140A-PS Consists of Component Part 3 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 160 CS2Y160A-PS Numbers !6, !8, and @0 4 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 125 CS2Y125AA-PS With single-side cushion 5 Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated 140 CS2Y140AA-PS Consists of Component Part 6 Bushing Oil-impregnated sintered alloy 160 CS2Y160AA-PS Numbers !6, !7 (two), !8, and @0 7 Tie-rod Carbon steel Zinc chromated 125 CS2Y125AR-PS 8 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Nickel plated With single-side cushion 140 CS2Y140AR-PS Consists of Component Part 9 Cushion ring Stainless steel 160 CS2Y160AR-PS Numbers !6, !7 (one), !8 and @0. 10 Cushion valve Rolled steel Nickel plated ∗ Seal kit does not include a grease pack. 11 Piston nut Carbon steel Nickel plated Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is needed. 12 Flat washer Carbon steel Nickel plated Grease pack part number: GR-L-005 (5 g), GR-S-010 (10 g), GR-L-150 (150g) 13 Wear ring Resin 14 Magnet∗ — 15 Retaining ring Spring steel Phosphate treatment 16 Rod seal NBR 17 Cushion seal∗∗ Urethane 18 Piston seal NBR 19 Valve seal NBR 20 Tube gasket NBR 21 Piston gasket NBR ∗ For types with built-in magnet or with auto switch. ∗∗ Used with cushion only.
1232 ∗∗∗ Referto“Minimum StrokeforAutoSwitchMounting” onpage1239. Foot: ∗∗∗ Referto“MinimumStrokeforAutoSwitchMounting”onpage1239. Basic: Dimensions ∗∗ Forautoswitchmountingposition anditsmountingheight,refertopage1238. ∗∗ Forautoswitchmountingpositionanditsheight,refertopage1238. Bore size Bore size Bore size Bore size ∗ ∗ Theminimumstrokewithrodbootis30mmormore. (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) The minimumstrokewithrod bootis30mmormore. 160 140 125 160 140 125 øe 160 140 125 160 140 125 øe With rodboot With rodboot CS2YL CS2YB Stroke range Stroke range Up to1600 Up to1600 Up to1600 Up to1200 Up to1000 Up to1000 34.5 30.5 30.5 TLY LT N 9 9 8 (mm) (mm) ZZ ZZ h h + + 1 1 + l l + l l 118 112 100 LX 3/4 1/2 1/2 l P l +Stroke +Stroke Width acrossflats f f 56 50 50 56 50 50 A A 194.5 178.5 156.5 Width acrossflats 106 98 98 S AL 53 47 47 AL 53 47 47 Without rodboot 120 110 110 M36 x1.5 M30 x1.5 M30 x1.5 H MM MM B 177 157 143 B KA B 177 157 143 øE MM
øE 256.5 235 235 ZZ
øD KA øD 177 157 143 B C 144 128 115 AL AL 34.5 30.5 30.5 A A 75 75 75 N LT e C 144 128 115 H H K K 38 32 32 D 3/4 1/2 1/2 40 40 40 P f F F 38 32 32 D 78.5 71 71 G G E NXY N With rodboot 141 133 133 106 98 98 S h 78.5 71 71 E (Rc, NPT,G) 2 x 2 x (Rc, NPT,G) 42 43 43 ZZ F P P 50 45 45 ZZ X +Stroke 42 43 43 1 1 1 F / / / 5 5 5 stroke stroke stroke +Stroke LS S S 18 15 15 l G +Stroke +Stroke +Stroke 25 30 20 Y 18 15 15 G M16 x1.5 M14 x1.5 M14 x1.5 Without rodboot 120 110 110 277.5 258 258 H ZZ M16 x1.5 M14 x1.5 M14 x1.5 (mm) J Smooth Cylinder 1 J 301 283 273 ZZ N G G 15 15 15 V M 75 75 75 e 4 xø 15 15 15 V 20 17 17 W LD YN X 40 40 40 20 17 17 W f 4 x LY 4 x 17 15 15 K J J 141 133 133 Series With rodboot 17 15 15 Port LH Port K h KA 34 27 27 KA 34 27 27 B C C LX 1 1 1 / / / B 5 5 5 VW VW stroke stroke stroke 30.5 27 27 M LD l 19 19 19 Cushion valve Cushion valve CS2Y M36 x1.5 M30 x1.5 M30 x1.5 106 100 85 LH MM ZZ 322 306 296 (mm) 1233 206 188 188 1 (mm) (mm) LS -X D- RZQ RHC MQ CX CY CY REC REB REA Series CS2Y
Dimensions Rod flange: CS2YF Port With rod boot G G VW Width across flats KA 4 x J 2 x P Cushion valve MM (Rc, NPT, G) 4 x øFD e E D B ø ø FY ø
l f AL FT C A F N h + l K N B ZZ1 + l + Stroke H S + Stroke M FX ZZ + Stroke FZ
(mm) Bore size Stroke range A AL B B C D E F FD FT FX FY FZ G J V (mm) (mm) 125 Up to 1600 50 47 143 145 115 32 71 43 19 14 190 100 230 15 M14 x 1.5 15 140 Up to 1600 50 47 157 160 128 32 71 43 19 20 212 112 255 15 M14 x 1.5 15 160 Up to 1600 56 53 177 180 144 38 78.5 42 19 20 236 118 275 18 M16 x 1.5 15 (mm) Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot W K KA M MM N P S (mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1 125 17 15 27 13 M30 x 1.5 30.5 1/2 98 110 221 75 40 133 1/5 stroke 244 140 17 15 27 13 M30 x 1.5 30.5 1/2 98 110 221 75 40 133 1/5 stroke 244 160 20 17 34 15 M36 x 1.5 34.5 3/4 106 120 241 75 40 141 1/5 stroke 262 ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. ∗∗ For auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 1238. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 1239.
Head flange: CS2YG Port With rod boot G G VW Width across flats KA 4 x J 2 x P Cushion valve MM (Rc, NPT, G) 4 x øFD e E D B ø ø ø FY
AL l f A F N K N C h + l H S + Stroke FT B ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke FX FZ
(mm) Bore size Stroke range A AL B B C D E F FD FT FX FY FZ G J V (mm) (mm) 125 Up to 1000 50 47 143 145 115 32 71 43 19 14 190 100 230 15 M14 x 1.5 15 140 Up to 1000 50 47 157 160 128 32 71 43 19 20 212 112 255 15 M14 x 1.5 15 160 Up to 1200 56 53 177 180 144 38 78.5 42 19 20 236 118 275 18 M16 x 1.5 15 (mm) Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot W K KA MM NPS (mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1 125 17 15 27 M30 x 1.5 30.5 1/2 98 110 222 75 40 133 1/5 stroke 245 140 17 15 27 M30 x 1.5 30.5 1/2 98 110 228 75 40 133 1/5 stroke 251 160 20 17 34 M36 x 1.5 34.5 3/4 106 120 246 75 40 141 1/5 stroke 267 ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. ∗∗ For auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 1238. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 1239. 1234 Smooth Cylinder Series CS2Y
Dimensions Single clevis: CS2YC
With rod boot Width across flats KA G G Port VW 2 x P øCDH10 4 x J Cushion valve MM (Rc, NPT, G) e E D ø ø ø B
l f AL U CX h + l A F N N CT K Z1 + l + Stroke C ZZ1 + l + Stroke H S + Stroke L CB Z + Stroke RR ZZ + Stroke
Double clevis: CS2YD
With rod boot Port Width across flats KA G G VW 2 x P øCD hole H10 4 x J Cushion valve MM (Rc, NPT, G) Shaft d9 e D E ø ø ø B REA l f AL U REB h + l A F N N CT CX K Z1 + l + Stroke CZ REC ZZ1 + l + Stroke H S + Stroke L C Z + Stroke RR CB CY ZZ + Stroke CX MQ RHC (mm) Bore size Stroke range Single clevis Double clevis A AL B C CB CDH10 CT D E F G J V W RZQ (mm) (mm) CX CX CZ +0.084 –0.1 +0.3 0 125 Up to 1000 50 47 143 115 145 25 0 17 32 –0.3 32 +0.1 64 –0.2 32 71 43 15 M14 x 1.5 15 17 +0.084 –0.1 +0.3 0 140 Up to 1000 50 47 157 128 160 28 0 17 36 –0.3 36 +0.1 72 –0.2 32 71 43 15 M14 x 1.5 15 17 +0.100 –0.1 +0.3 0 160 Up to 1200 56 53 177 144 180 32 0 20 40 –0.3 40 +0.1 80 –0.2 38 78.5 42 18 M16 x 1.5 15 20 (mm) Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot K KA L MM N P S U RR (mm) H Z ZZ e f h l Z1 ZZ1 125 15 27 65 M30 x 1.5 30.5 1/2 98 35 29 110 273 302 75 40 133 1/5 stroke 296 325 140 15 27 75 M30 x 1.5 30.5 1/2 98 40 32 110 283 315 75 40 133 1/5 stroke 306 338 160 17 34 80 M36 x 1.5 34.5 3/4 106 45 36 120 306 342 75 40 141 1/5 stroke 327 363 D- ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. ∗∗ For auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 1238. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 1239. -X 1235 Series CS2Y
Dimensions Center trunnion: CS2YT
With rod boot Z + 1/2 stroke Port G G VW 2 x P 4 x Cushion valve 1 + + 1/2 stroke Width across J Z l (Rc, NPT, G) MM flats KA e8 R TD ø e E D ø ø ø TY
AL l f A F N TT N h + l C K B ZZ1 + l + Stroke H S + Stroke M TX ZZ + Stroke TZ
(mm) Bore size Stroke range A AL B C D E F G J V W K KA M MM N (mm) (mm) 125 25 to 1000 50 47 143 115 32 71 43 15 M14 x 1.5 15 17 15 27 13 M30 x 1.5 30.5 140 30 to 1000 50 47 157 128 32 71 43 15 M14 x 1.5 15 17 15 27 13 M30 x 1.5 30.5 160 35 to 1200 56 53 177 144 38 78.5 42 18 M16 x 1.5 15 20 17 34 15 M36 x 1.5 34.5 (mm) Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot PR S TDe8 TT TX TY TZ (mm) H Z ZZ e f h l Z1 ZZ1 –0.050 1 125 1/2 1 98 32 –0.089 50 170 164 234 110 159 221 75 40 133 /5 stroke 182 244 –0.050 1 140 1/2 1.5 98 36 –0.089 55 190 184 262 110 159 221 75 40 133 /5 stroke 182 244 –0.050 1 160 3/4 1.5 106 40 –0.089 60 212 204 292 120 173 241 75 40 141 /5 stroke 194 262 ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more for ø125, ø140 and 35 mm or more for ø160. ∗∗ For auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 1238. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 1239.
1236 Series CS2Y Accessory Bracket
I Type Single Knuckle Joint∗ Knuckle Pin / Clevis Pin
ø
L2 ø ø x ø Material: Cast iron Material: Carbon steel (mm) (mm)
Applicable Applicable Applicable Part no. bore size 1 2 1 1 1 1 Part no. bore size d9 2 d A A E L MM NDH10 NX RR U D L L m (Drill through) split pin (mm) (mm) +0.084 –0.1 –0.065 I-12A 125 8 54 46 100 M30 x 1.5 25 0 32 –0.3 27 33 IY-12 125 25 –0.117 79.5 69.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 +0.084 –0.1 –0.065 I-14A 140 8 54 48 105 M30 x 1.5 28 0 36 –0.3 30 39 IY-14 140 28 –0.117 86.5 76.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 +0.1 –0.1 –0.080 I-16A 160 8 60 55 110 M36 x 1.5 32 0 40 –0.3 34 39 IY-16 160 32 –0.142 94.5 84.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 ∗ Split pin is included.
Y Type Double Knuckle Joint∗ Rod End Nut
øND hole H10 Shaft d9 ø
Material: Cast iron (mm) Material: Rolled steel Applicable (mm) Part no. bore size A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX NZ RR1 U1 (mm) Applicable Part no. bore size +0.084 +0.3 –0.1 d H B C D Y-12A 125 8 46 100 M30 x 1.5 25 0 32 +0.1 64 –0.3 27 42 (mm) +0.084 +0.3 –0.1 Y-14A 140 8 48 105 M30 x 1.5 28 0 36 +0.1 72 –0.3 30 47 NT-12 125, 140 M30 x 1.5 18 46 53.1 44 +0.1 +0.3 –0.1 Y-16A 160 8 55 110 M36 x 1.5 32 0 40 +0.1 80 –0.3 34 46 NT-16 160 M36 x 1.5 21 55 63.5 53 ∗ Use a single knuckle joint or a double knuckle joint individually. (Screw it entirely over the rod end threads and tighten it.) ∗ Extend the dimensions of A, H. when using a single/double knuckle joint together with a rod end nut. (To extend dimensions A, H, refer to the below table, and specify the product as made-to-order -XA0.) REA ∗ A pin and split pin are included with the double knuckled joint. REB “Made to order” with rod end bracket (-XC86) is available when ordering cylinders and accessories together. Please refer to page 2147 for details. REC CY Single/Double Knuckle Joint CX H A MQ RHC RZQ
L1
H1 A, H Dimensions when Mounting a (mm) Single/Double Knuckle Joint together Symbol Applicable knuckle joint part number with a Rod End Nut (mm) Bore H A L1 H1 size (mm) I type single knuckle Y type double knuckle Bore size (mm) A H 125 110 50 3.5 100 156.5 I-12A Y-12A 125 65 125 D- 140 110 50 3.5 105 161.5 I-14A Y-14A 140 65 125 160 120 56 3.5 110 170.5 I-16A Y-16A 160 76 140 -X 1237 Series CS2Y Auto Switch Mounting 1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
Applicable cable O.D. D-M9A/M9AV type D-Y7BA type G1/2 ø6.8 to ø9.6 A 49 ≈ Hs A Auto switch ≈ Hs Ht ≈ 34
36 B B Auto switch D-A5/A6 type D-A44 type Applicable cable O.D. G1/2 ø6.8 to ø9.6 33 A 34.5 ≈ Hs A Auto switch ≈ Hs Ht ≈ 56 Ht ≈
36 B B Auto switch D-F5/J5/D-F5NT type ∗ The indicator light faces the inside. D-F5BA/F59F type D-F5W/J59W type A 30 Auto switch ≈ Hs Ht ≈ Ht ≈
B
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto D-M9 D-Z7/Z80 D-A5 D-F5W switch D-M9V D-Y5/Y6 D-A6 D-J59W model D-A9 D-M9 W D-Y7P/Y7PV D-A3 D-F5BA D-A59W D-F5NT D-A9V D-M9WV D-Y7W D-A44 D-F5 D-M9A D-Y7WV D-G39 D-J5 D-M9AV D-Y7BA D-K39 D-F59F Bore size A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 125 9 8 13 12 6.5 5.5 3 2 7 6 9.5 8.5 14.5 13.5 140 9 8 13 12 6.5 5.5 3 2 7 6 9.5 8.5 14.5 13.5 160 9 8 13 12 6.5 5.5 3 2 7 6 9.5 8.5 14.5 13.5 ∗ Provided as guidelines for auto switch proper mounting position (detection at stroke end). When setting an auto switch, confirm the operation and adjust its mounting position.
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto D-Z7/Z80 D-F5 switch D-A9 D-Y5/Y6 D-J5 model D-A9V D-M9V D-Y7P D-A3 D-A5 D-F5W D-M9 D-M9WV D-Y7PV D-G39 D-A44 D-A6 D-J59W D-M9W D-M9AV D-Y7W D-K39 D-A59W D-F5BA D-M9A D-Y7WV D-F59F D-Y7BA D-F5NT Bore size Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Ht Hs Hs Hs Ht Hs Ht 125 69 69.5 71.5 69.5 69 69.5 116 126 75.5 69.5 74.5 70 140 76 76 77.5 76 76 76 124 134 81 76.5 80 76.5 160 85 85 86 85 85 85 134.5 144.5 89 87.5 88 87.5 1238 Auto Switch Mounting Series CS2Y
Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting
n: Number of auto switches (mm) Auto switch Number of auto switches Mounting brackets Center trunnion model mounted other than center trunnion ø125 ø140 ø160 With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 15 100 105 110 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-A9 (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 40 100 + 40 105 + 40 110 + 40 With n pcs. 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 10 75 80 85 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-A9V (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 10 + 30 75 + 30 80 + 30 85 + 30 With n pcs. 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 15 105 110 115 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-M9 (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) D-M9W 15 + 40 105 + 40 110 + 40 115 + 40 With n pcs. 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 10 80 85 90 D-M9V Same surface), With 1 pc. (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) D-M9WV 10 + 30 80 + 30 85 + 30 90 + 30 With n pcs. 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 20 115 120 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-M9A (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) 20 + 40 115 + 40 120 + 40 With n pcs. 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 15 90 95 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-M9AV (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 30 90 + 30 95 + 30 With n pcs. 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) D-A5/A6 With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, D-A59W 25 125 135 D-F5/J5 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-F5W (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) D-J59W 25 + 55 125 + 55 135 + 55 D-F5BA With n pcs. (Same surface) 2 2 2 D-F59F (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 35 145 155 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-F5NT (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) 35 + 55 145 + 55 155 + 55 With n pcs. (Same surface) 2 2 2 REA (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) Different surfaces 35 110 REB With
2 pcs. Same surface 100 110 + 30(n – 2) D-A3 Different surfaces 35 + 30(n – 2) D-G39 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) REC D-K39 110 + 100(n – 2) Same surface 100 + 100(n – 2)
With n pcs. (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) CY With 1 pc. 15 110 Different surfaces 35 110 CX With
2 pcs. Same surface 55 110 + 30(n – 2) Different surfaces 35 + 30(n – 2) D-A44 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) MQ 110 + 50(n – 2) Same surface 55 + 55(n – 2)
With n pcs. (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) RHC With 1 pc. 15 110 D-Z7 With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 15 105 110 115 RZQ D-Z80 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-Y59 (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 15 + 40 105 + 40 110 + 40 115 + 40 D-Y7P With n pcs. 2 2 2 2 D-Y7W (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 10 90 95 100 D-Y69 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-Y7PV (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 10 + 30 90 + 30 95 + 30 100 + 30 D-Y7WV With n pcs. 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) With 2 pcs. (Different surfaces, 20 115 120 125 Same surface), With 1 pc. D-Y7BA (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) 20 + 45 115 + 45 120 + 45 125 + 45 D- With n pcs. 2 2 2 2 (n = 2, 4, 6, 8···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) (n = 4, 8, 12, 16···) -X 1239 Series CS2Y Auto Switch Mounting 2
Operating Range Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
(mm) Bore size Bore size (mm) Auto switch model Auto switch model 125 140 160 ø125 ø140 ø160 D-A9/A9V 12 12.5 11.5 D-A9/A9V D-M9 /M9 V D-M9/M9V BS5-125 BS5-125 BS5-160 D-M9 W/M9 WV D-M9W/M9WV 6 6.5 6.5 D-M9 A/M9 AV D-M9A/M9AV D-A5/A6 D-Z7/Z80 14 14.5 13 D-A59W D-A3 /A44 D-F5 /J5 10 10 10 BT-12 BT-12 BT-16 D-A5/A6 D-F5NT D-A59W 17 17 17 D-F5W/J59W D-F5BAL/F59F D-Y59/Y69 D-A3/A44 D-Y7P/Y7PV BS1-125 BS1-140 BS1-160 12 13 7 D-G39/K39 D-Y7W/Y7WV D-Y7BA D-Z7/Z80 D-Y59/Y69 D-F5/J5/F5W D-Y7P/Y7PV BS4-125 BS4-125 BS4-160 D-J59W/F5BA 5 5 5.5 D-Y7W/Y7WV D-F5NT/F59F D-Y7BA D-G39/K39 11 11 10 [Mounting screws set made of stainless steel] ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel (including set screws) is also available. Use it in to be guaranteed. accordance with the operating environment. (Please order the auto switch mounting bracket separately, since it is (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) not included.) There may be the case it will vary substantially BBA1: For D-A5, A6, F5, J5 type depending on an ambient environment. “D-F5BA” auto switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when shipped. When only an auto switch is shipped independently, “BBA1” screws are attached. Note) When using the D-M9A/M9AV or Y7BA model, do not use the steel set screw which is included with the auto switch mounting bracket in the above table (BS5-, BS4-). Please separately prepare the stainless steel screw set (BBA1), and select and use the M4 x 8L stainless steel set screw included in BBA1.
Note 1) Refer to page 1997 for the details of BBA1 screws. ∗ Shows an example of mounting the D-A9(V), M9(V), M9W(V), M9A(V) model.
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features D-A90V Without indicator light Grommet (Perpendicular) D-A93V, A96V D-Z73, Z76 — Reed auto switch D-A53, A56 Grommet (in-line) D-A67 Without indicator light D-Z80 D-F59, F5P, J59 — D-Y59A, Y59B, Y7P D-F59W, F5PW, J59W Grommet (in-line) 2-color indication D-Y7NW, Y7PW, Y7BW D-F5BAL, Y7BA Water resistant (2-color indication) Solid state auto switch D-F5NT With timer D-M9NV, M9PV, M9BV — D-Y69A, Y69B, Y7PV D-M9NWV, M9PWV, M9BWV Grommet (Perpendicular) 2-color indication D-Y7NWV, Y7PWV, Y7BWV D-M9NAV, M9PAV, M9BAV Water resistant (2-color indication) ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 to 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switches (D-F9G, F9H, Y7G, Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to pages 1911 and 1913.
1240 Smooth Cylinder Specific Product Precautions 1 Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit Refer to the diagrams below when controlling speed with the smooth cylinder. Warning Horizontal operation (Speed control) I II
∗ ∗
Dual speed controller Meter-in speed controller Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the Meter-in speed controllers can reduce lurching while controlling meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip. More stable low speed the speed. The two adjustment needles facilitate adjustment. operation can be achieved than meter-in circuit alone.
Vertical operation (Speed control)
I II ∗ P2 W A ∗ P1 a (c) REA (b) P0 REB
P0 REC ∗ CY a ∗ A CX W MQ RHC (1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently (1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗ the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗ RZQ (2) Depending on the size of the load, installing a regulator with (2) Installing a regulator with check valve at position (c) can check valve at position (b) can reduce lurching during descent reduce lurching during descent and operation delay during and operation delay during ascent. ascent. As a guide, As a guide, when W + P0a>P0A, adjust P2 to make W + P2A = P0a. adjust P1 to make W + P1a = P0A.
W: Load (N) P0: Operating pressure (MPa) P1, P2: Reduced pressure (MPa) a: Rod side piston area (mm2) A: Head side piston area (mm2) D- -X 1241 Smooth Cylinder Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Lubricant Air Source Caution Caution 1. Operate without lubrication. 1. Take measure to prevent pressure fluctuations. Lubrication may cause malfunction. Pressure fluctuations may cause malfunction. 2. Do not use grease not specified by SMC. Using grease other than that specified may cause malfunction. Order using the following part numbers when only maintenance grease is needed. Grease Volume Part no. 5 g GR-L-005 10 g GR-L-010 150 g GR-L-150
3. Do not wipe off grease from the sliding part of the air cylinder. Wiping grease from the sliding part of the air cylinder forcefully may cause malfunction.
1242 Low Speed Cylinder Series CJ2X/CUX/CQSX/CQ2X/CM2X ø10, ø16 ø10 to ø32 ø12 to ø25 ø32 to ø100 ø20 to ø40
Air Cylinder Bore size Minimum operating Minimum operating Page Series CJ2X (mm) pressure (MPa) piston speed (mm/s) 10, 16 0.06 1 1246
Free Mount Cylinder Bore size Minimum operating Minimum operating Series CUX (mm) pressure (MPa) piston speed (mm/s) 10, 16 0.06 1 20, 25, 32 0.05 0.5 1256
Compact Cylinder Bore size Minimum operating Minimum operating (mm) pressure (MPa) piston speed (mm/s) Series CQSX 12, 16 0.03 1 20, 25 0.025 0.5 1261
Compact Cylinder Bore size Minimum operating Minimum operating (mm) pressure (MPa) piston speed (mm/s) Series CQ2X REA 32, 40 0.025 0.5 50, 63, 80, 100 0.01 0.5 1268 REB REC CY Air Cylinder Bore size Minimum operating Minimum operating Series CM2X (mm) pressure (MPa) piston speed (mm/s) CX 20, 25, 32, 40 0.025 0.5 MQ 1280 RHC RZQ Clean Series Compact Cylinder Compact Cylinder Air Cylinder Series 10-/11-CQSX Series 10-/11-CQ2X Series 10-/11-CM2X
D- -X 1243 LowLow SpeedSpeed CylinderCylinder
Improved low friction characteristics (CM2X, CQSX, CQ2X) Minimum operating pressure is reduced in half (compared to previous version). Stabilization of thrust has been realized.
Measurement circuit of cylinder output CQ2B40-75D (Standard) CQ2XB40-75D (Low speed cylinder) relative to supply pressure Rod side supply pressure: 0.025 MPa Rod side supply pressure: 0.025 MPa 686 686 Test cylinder Load converter 588 588 Theoretical thrust Theoretical thrust 490 490 Analyzing recorder Actual thrust Actual thrust Pressure 392 392 converter 294 294 Thrust (N) Thrust (N) 196 Pressure 196 converter Regulator (IR2000) 98 ITV (Electro-pneumatic regulator) 98 0 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Head side supply pressure (MPa) Head side supply pressure (MPa)
Stable low speed operation even at 0.5 mm/s (1 mm/s for ø16 or smaller) is achieved. Operates smoothly with minimal stick-slip.
CJ2XB10-60 CQSXB20-20D Average speed Average speed Average speed Average speed 2.0 0.85 mm/s 0.88 mm/s Acceleration 2.0 0.43 mm/s 0.43 mm/s curve Acceleration curve 0 0 Speed Speed (mm/s) (mm/s) Operating Operating Operating Operating -2.0 -2.0 direction direction direction OUT direction IN 60 OUT IN
40 Displacement
(mm) 20 waveform 20 Displacement waveform Displacement
0 20 sec. (mm) 0 20 sec. Displacement Time Time
Note 1) Average speed is what the stroke is divided by piston rod’s transit time. Data conditions • Working fluid ·················· Air Note 2) The OUT operating direction is considered to be positive with regard to speed. • Mounting orientation ······ Horizontal no-load • Operating pressure ········ 0.35 MPa • Operating circuit ············ Meter-in Possible to transfer a workpiece which must avoid shocks at lower speeds. Smooth start with a little ejection even after being rendered for hours.
Start after non-operation
The dimensions of all Conventional cylinder models are the same Speed → Low speed cylinder as those of standard Conventional cylinders. cylinder Low speed cylinder Stroke →
→ Time 1244 Clean room specification has been added. (10-/11-CQSX, CQ2X, CM2X) Particulate generation data for microspeed cylinder with clean room specifications are measured using the following test method. [Example of test method] The test sample is in place in an acrylic chamber. The chamber is set up on a Class 100 clean bench. The solenoid valve is operated while supplying a volume of clean air equal to the intake volume of a laser dust monitor (28.3 L/min). The amount of particle generation is measured for a specific number of operating cycles.
Measuring Conditions 10-CQSXB20-50D )
Chamber volume 15 L 3 Evaluation of air purity inside chamber 100 Purity of air supplied to Same quality as supply air chamber Hitachi Electoronics 10 Engineering Corporation Laser dust monitor TS-6200 1 Min. measurable particle dia.: 0.1 µm Intake rate: 28.3 L/min 0.1 Laser dust monitor Sampling time: 5 min setting conditions Interval time: 55 min
Particle concentration (particles/ft 0.01 Operating frequency: 30 cpm 0.01 0.1 1 10 Cylinder operating Average piston speed: 100 mm/s Particle diameter (µm) conditions Mounting: Horizontal no-load Supply pressure: 0.5 MPa 10-CM2XB20-50
) Evaluation of air purity inside chamber 3 100
Air cleaning system 10
Clean gas filter 1
Clean gas 0.1 REA filter
Particle concentration (particles/ft 0.01 REB 0.01 0.1 1 10 Clean bench (ISO Class 5 equivalent) Particle diameter (µm) REC
Supply rate 15 L/min CY Exhausted by relief port CX Laser dust monitor (intake rate 15 L/min) MQ RHC Particle generation measuring circuit ∗ The symbol for the cylinder is SMC original symbol. RZQ
D- -X 1245 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CJ2X ø10, ø16
How to Order
Bore size Standard stroke (mm) 10 10 mm ø10 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 100, 125, 150 16 16 mm ø16 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 ∗ Intermediate stroke other than above is manufactured upon Mounting style receipt of order. B Basic style Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model L Axial foot style Suffix the symbol “-A” (Rail mounting style) or “-B” F Rod side flange style (Band mounting style) to the end of part number for cylinder with auto switch. D Double clevis style Rail mounting style CDJ2XB10-45-A Example Band mounting style CDJ2XB16-60-B CJ2X L 16 60 ∗ For the rail mounting type, screws and nuts for two auto switches are included in the rail. With auto switch CDJ2X L 16 60 M9BW C Auto switch mounting With auto switch (Built-in magnet) Low speed cylinder bracket Note) Port location on head cover Note) This symbol is indicated Bore size Number of when the D-A9 or M9 (mm) ø10, ø16 type auto switch is Symbol Auto switch auto switches specified. Nil Perpendicular to axis Nil Without auto switch Nil 2 pcs. This mounting bracket does not apply to other R Axial direction ∗ For the applicable auto switch S 1 pc. model, refer to the table below. auto switches (D-C7 ∗ For configuration, refer to page 1247. n “n” pcs. and H7, etc.) (Nil) Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None Applicable load entry (Output) DC AC connector
Indicator light Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N) M9NV M9N — — —� 3-wire (NPN) — — F7NV F79 — —� 5 V,12 V IC circuit Grommet M9PV M9P — — —� 3-wire (PNP) —— — — F7PV F7P — —� M9BV M9B — — —� 2-wire 12 V — — F7BV J79 — —� — Connector — H7C J79C — — � — M9NWV M9NW — — —� 3-wire (NPN) Yes 24 V — — — F7NWV F79W — —� Relay, 5 V,12 V IC circuit Diagnostic indication M9PWV M9PW — — —� PLC 3-wire (PNP) (2-color indication) — — — F7PW — —� Grommet M9BWV M9BW — — —� 2-wire 12 V — Solid state auto switch — — F7BWV J79W — —� 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗ — — —� Water resistant 5 V,12 V IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗ — — —� (2-color indication) 2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗ — — —� — With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V,12 V — H7NF — F79F — —� IC circuit 3-wire 5 V — A96V A96 — A76H — — —� — IC circuit — (NPN equivalent) — Grommet Yes — 200 V — — A72 A72H — — —� — — —— 100 V A93V A93 A73 A73H — —� — No 100 V or less A90V A90 A80 A80H — — —� — IC circuit Relay, 2-wire 12 V Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — — � — — PLC Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — — � — IC circuit Reed auto switch Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — — — —� — — ∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 1255 for details. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order. ∗ D-A9/M9/M9W/A7/A80/F7/J7 auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (When D-A9/M9/M9W are specified, only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.) ∗ D-C7/C80/H7 auto switches are assembled at the time of shipment. ∗ Order auto switch mounting brackets separately when D-A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V)/M9A(V) types are mounted with a rail. Refer to page 1255 for details. 1246 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CJ2X
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 10 16 Action Double acting, Single rod Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 10.7 MPa Symbol Minimum operating pressure 0.06 MPa Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature Double acting, Single rod/Rubber bumper With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing) Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment) Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
+1.0 Stroke length tolerance 0 Piston speed 1 to 300 mm/s ø10 0.035 J Allowable kinetic energy ø16 0.090 J Precautions Standard Stroke
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for 10 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 100, 125, 150 Actuator and Auto Switch Precau- 16 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 tions. ∗ Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.) Mounting Style and Accessory Mounting Caution 1. During installation, secure the rod cover and Basic Axial foot Rod side Double∗ Mounting tighten by applying an appropriate tightening style style flange style clevis style force to the retaining but or to the rod cover body. Mounting nut If the head cover is secured or the head Rod end nut cover is tightened, the cover could rotate, Standard
equipment Clevis pin leading to the deviation. REA 2. Proper tightening torque for mounting thread Single knuckle joint should be within the range specified. Apply a Loctite® (no. 242 Blue) for mounting thread. Double knuckle joint∗ REB Option T-bracket Bore size Proper tightening torque for mounting thread (mm) (N·m) (tightening torque for mounting nut) ∗ Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with double clevis and double knuckle joint. REC ···Supplied with the product. 10 3.0 to 3.2 ···Please order separately. C Y 16 5.4 to 5.9 3. To remove and install the retaining ring for Port Location on Head Cover CX the knuckle pin or the clevis pin, use an appropriate pair of pliers (tool for installing a For basic style, the port position in a head cover is available either perpendicular to the type C retaining ring). axis or in-line with the cylinder axis. MQ Especially with ø10, use ultra thin pliers, such as Super Tool Corp., CSM-07A. RHC 4. For the auto switch mounting rail, do not remove the pre-equipped rail. Since the RZQ mounting thread is drilled through inside a the cylinder, it will result in air leakage. Axial direction Perpendicular Operating Precautions Warning Mounting Bracket Part No. 1. It might not be able to control by meter-out at a low speed operation. Mounting Bore size (mm) Caution bracket 10 16 1. For Series CJ2X, 0.1 N L/min is the values at Foot bracket CJ-L010B CJ-L016B D- maximum in terms of its construction and Flange bracket CJ-F010B CJ-F016B there is internal leakage (ANR). ∗ T-bracket CJ-T010B CJ-T016B -X ∗ T-bracket is used with double clevis (D). 1247 Series CJ2X
Basic Style (B)
CJ2XB Bore size Stroke Port location on head cover
Mounting nut ∗
CJ2XB10, 16 Rod end nut Piping port 2 x M5 x 0.8 Piping port M5 x 0.8 0 -0.3 B
Port location on head cover: S + Stroke Axial location (R) Z + Stroke
∗ For details of the mounting nut, refer to page 1250. (mm) Bore size (mm) A B C D F GA GB H MM NA NB NDh8 NN S T Z 0 10 15 12 14 4 8 8 5 28 M4 x 0.7 12.5 9.5 8 –0.022 M8 x 1.0 46 — 74 0 16 15 18.3 20 5 8 8 5 28 M5 x 0.8 12.5 9.5 10 –0.022 M10 x 1.0 47 — 75
Axial Foot Style (L)
CJ2XL Bore size Stroke Port location on head cover
CJ2XL10, 16 Mounting nut ∗ Piping port 2 x M5 x 0.8 Piping port Cover surface Rod end nut M5 x 0.8 0 -0.3 B
S + Stroke Port location on head cover: Z + Stroke Axial location (R)
∗ For details of the mounting nut, refer to page 1250.
Bore size (mm) A B C D F GA GB H LB LC LH LT LX LY LZ MM NA NB NN S T X Y Z 10 15 12 14 4 8 8 5 28 15 4.5 9 1.6 24 16.5 32 M4 x 0.7 12.5 9.5 M8 x 1.0 46 — 5 7 74 16 15 18.3 20 5 8 8 5 28 23 5.5 14 2.3 33 25 42 M5 x 0.8 12.5 9.5 M10 x 1.0 47 — 6 9 75
1248 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CJ2X
Rod Side Flange Style (F)
CJ2XF Bore size Stroke Port location on head cover
CJ2XF10, 16 Mounting nut ∗ Piping port Rod end nut Cover surface Piping port 2 x M5 x 0.8 M5 x 0.8 0 -0.3 B
Mounting hole S + Stroke Port location on head cover: Z + Stroke Axial location (R)
∗ For details of the mounting nut, refer to page 1250. (mm) Bore size (mm) A B C D F FB FC FT FX FY FZ GA GB H MM NA NB NN S T Z 10 15 12 14 4 8 13 4.5 1.6 24 14 32 8 5 28 M4 x 0.7 12.5 9.5 M8 x 1.0 46 — 74 16 15 18.3 20 5 8 19 5.5 2.3 33 20 42 8 5 28 M5 x 0.8 12.5 9.5 M10 x 1.0 47 — 75
Double Clevis Style (D)
CJ2XD Bore size Stroke Z + Stroke S + Stroke Rod end nut Piping port 2 x M5 x 0.8 Clevis pin 0 -0.3 0 -0.3 B
T-bracket CZ For details, refer to page 1250. REA REB ZZ + Stroke REC ∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring are shipped together. (mm) CY Bore size (mm) A B C CD (cd) CX CZ D GA GB H MM NA NB R S U Z ZZ 10 15 12 14 3.3 3.2 12 4 8 18 28 M4 x 0.7 12.5 22.5 5 46 8 82 93 CX 16 15 18.3 20 5 6.5 18.3 5 8 23 28 M5 x 0.8 12.5 27.5 8 47 10 85 99 MQ T-bracket Dimensions (mm) Bore size (mm) TC TH TV TW TX TY RHC 10 4.5 29 40 22 32 12 16 5.5 35 48 28 38 16 RZQ
D- -X 1249 Series CJ2X Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint (mm) Clevis Pin (mm) Knuckle Pin (mm)
L1 L1 12
Material: Rolled steel Material: Stainless steel Material: Stainless steel
Applicable H10 Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Part no. 1 1 1 1 Part no. Dd9 d L L1 m t Part no. 1 bore A L MM NXND R U bore retaining ring bore Dd9 d L L m t retaining ring +0.048 3.3–0.030 –0.030 I-J010B 10 8 21 M4 x 0.7 3.3 0 3.1 8 9 CD-J010 10 –0.060 3 15.2 12.2 1.2 0.3 Type C 3.2 CD-J010 10 3.3–0.060 3 15.2 12.2 1.2 0.3 Type C 3.2 +0.048 5.3–0.030 –0.030 I-J016B 16 8 25 M5 x 0.8 5.30 6.4 12 14 CD-Z015 16 –0.060 4.8 22.7 18.3 1.5 0.7 Type C 5 IY-J015 16 5.3–0.060 4.8 16.6 12.2 1.5 0.7 Type C 5 ∗ Retaining rings are packaged with clevis pins. ∗ For size ø10, clevis pin is diverted. ∗ Retaining rings are packaged with knuckle pins.
Double Knuckle Joint (mm) Mounting Nut (mm) Rod End Nut (mm)
hole axis 12
Material: Rolled steel Material: Brass Material: Iron
Part no. Applicable bore A1 L L1 MM Part no. Applicable B C d H Part no. Applicable B C d H Y-J010B 10 8 15.2 21 M4 x 0.7 bore bore Y-J016B 16 11 16.6 21 M5 x 0.8 SNJ-010B 10 11 12.7 M8 x 1.0 4 NTJ-010A 10 7 8.1 M4 x 0.7 3.2 SNJ-016B 16 14 16.2 M10 x 1.0 4 NTJ-015A 16 8 9.2 M5 x 0.8 4 Part no. NDd9 NDH10 NX R1 U1 –0.030 +0.048 Y-J010B 3.3 –0.060 3.3 0 3.2 8 10 –0.030 +0.048 Y-J016B 5 –0.060 5 0 6.5 12 10 ∗ Knuckle pin and retaining ring are shipped together.
T-bracket (mm) Rod End Cap (mm)
Flat type/CJ-CF Round type/CJ-CR Double clevis style cylinder 4 x øTC
Material: Polyacetal Applicable Part no. Applicable Part no. TC TDH10 TH TK TN TT TU TV TW TX TY TZ A D L MM N R W bore Flat type Round type bore +0.048 CJ-T010B 10 4.5 3.3 0 29 18 3.1 2 9 40 22 32 12 8 CJ-CF010 CJ-CR010 10 8 10 13 M4 x 0.7 6 10 8 +0.048 CJ-T016B 16 5.5 5 0 35 20 6.4 2.3 14 48 28 38 16 10 CJ-CF016 CJ-CR016 16 10 12 15 M5 x 0.8 7 12 10 ∗ T-bracket includes a T-bracket base, single knuckle joint, hexagon socket head cap screw and spring washer.
1250 Series CJ2X Auto Switch Mounting 1 Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Reed auto switch Solid state auto switch
D-A9 D-M9 D-M9W D-M9A ≅HS Auto switch ≅HS
16.5 Auto switch 16.5
A 24.5 B (22) A 22 B (24) ( ): Values for D-A96 A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/ ( ): Values for D-M9A rod cover to the end of the auto switch. A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/ rod cover to the end of the auto switch. D-A9V D-M9V D-M9MV D-M9AV ≅HS Auto switch HS 16.5 ≅ Auto switch 16.5
A 22 B A 20 B A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/ (22) rod cover to the end of the auto switch. ( ): Values for D-M9AV A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/ rod cover to the end of the auto switch.
D-C7/C80 D-H7 Auto switch Auto switch ≅ Hs D-H7W D-H7NF
≅ Hs REA REB
D-C73C/C80C D-H7C REC
Auto switch ≅ Hs ≅ Hs Auto switch CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1251 Series CJ2X Auto Switch Mounting 2 Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Reed auto switch Solid state auto switch
D-A9 D-M9 D-M9W Auto switch D-M9A Auto switch s s H H ≅ ≅ 12.5 12.5 A 26 B 12.5 12.5 A 23.5 B (23.5) (25.5) ( ): Values for D-A96 ( ): Values for D-M9A D-A9V D-M9V D-M9WV
Auto switch D-M9AV Auto switch s s H H ≅ ≅
12.5 12.5 A 23.5 B 14.5 14.5 A 21.5 B (23.5) ( ): Values for D-M9AV
D-A7/A80 D-F7/J79 D-F7W/J79W Auto switch Auto switch D-F79F s s H H ≅ ≅ Minimum lead wire bending radius 10
D-A7H/A80H Auto switch D-F7V/F7WV Auto switch s s H H ≅ ≅ ≅ Minimum lead wire bending radius 10
Auto switch D-A73C/A80C Auto switch D-J79C s s H H ≅ ≅
D-A79W Auto switch s H ≅ Minimum lead wire bending radius 10
1252 Auto Switch Mounting Series CJ2X
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto switch Band mounting Rail mounting model D-M9 D-M9 D-A7H/A80H D-A73C/A80C D-M9V D-C7 D-H7 D-M9V D-F7/J79 D-A9 D-M9W D-C80 D-H7C D-A9 D-M9W D-A7 D-F7NT D-A79W D-A9 V D-M9 WV D-C73C D-H7NF D-A9 V D-M9 WV D-A80 D-F7W/J79W D-F7 V/F7 WV D-M9A D-C80C D-H7W D-M9A D-M9 AV D-M9 AV D-F79F D-J79C Bore size (mm) A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 10 2 2 6 6 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.5 4.5 4.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 8.5 8.5 0.5 0.5 16 2.5 2.5 6.5 6.5 3 3 2 2 1 1 5 5 3.5 3.5 4 4 9 9 1 1 Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto switch Band mounting Rail mounting model D-A9 D-C7 D-A7 H/A80H D-A9 D-M9V D-A9 V D-C80 D-F7 /J79 D-M9 D-M9WV D-C73C D-A7 D-M9 D-A73C D-F7 V D-H7 D-H7C D-F7 W/J79W D-J79C D-A79W D-M9W D-M9AV D-C80C D-A80 D-M9 V D-A80C D-F7 WV D-H7 W D-F79F D-M9A D-A9V D-M9 W D-H7NF D-F7NT Bore D-M9WV size (mm) Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs 10 17 18 17 19.5 20 16.5 17.5 17.5 23.5 20 23 19 16 20.5 21 20.5 23 23.5 19.5 21 20.5 26.5 23 26 22
REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1253 Series CJ2X Auto Switch Mounting 3 Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm) No. of auto switch mounted Auto switch mounting Auto switch model 2 pcs. n pcs. (n: No. of auto switch) 1 pc. Different surfaces Same surface Different surfaces Same surface (n-2) D-M9/M9W 15 + 35 45 + 15 (n-2) 10 15 Note 1) 45 Note 1) 2 D-M9A/A9 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 4) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 15 + 35 35 + 25 (n-2) D-M9V 5 15 Note 1) 35 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 4) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-M9WV 15 + 35 35 + 25 (n-2) 10 15 Note 1) 35 2 D-M9AV (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 4) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 10 + 35 35 + 25 (n-2) Band mounting D-A9V 5 10 35 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 4) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-C7 15 + 40 50 + 20 (n-2) 10 15 50 2 D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 4) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-H7/H7W 15 + 45 60 + 22.5 (n-2) 10 15 60 2 D-H7NF (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 4) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-C73C 15 + 50 50 + 27.5 (n-2) D-C80C 10 15 65 2 D-H7C (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 4) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) 10 + 10 (n-2) D-M9 V 5 — 5 — (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) 10 + 15 (n-2) D-A9 V 5 — 10 — (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) D-M9 15 + 15 (n-2) 10 (5) — 10 — D-A9 (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) D-M9WV 15 + 15 (n-2) 10 — 15 — D-M9AV (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) D-M9W 20 + 15 (n-2) 15 (10) — 15 — D-M9A (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) D-A7/A80 15 + 10 (n-2) D-A7H/A80H 5 — 10 — (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) Rail mounting D-A73C/A80C D-A7H 15 + 15 (n-2) 5 — 10 — D-A80H (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) 10 + 15 (n-2) D-A79W 10 — 15 — (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) D-F7 15 + 15 (n-2) 5 — 5 — D-J79 (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) D-F7V 10 + 10 (n-2) 5 — 5 — D-J79C (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) D-F7W/J79W 15 + 20 (n-2) D-F79F 10 — 15 — Note 5) D-F7NT (n = 4, 6···) 10 + 15 (n-2) D-F7WV 10 — 15 — (n = 4, 6···) Note 5) Note 4) When “n” is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. Note 5) When “n” is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. However, the minimum even number is 4. So, 4 is used for the calculation when “n” is 1 to 3. Note 1) Auto switch mounting With 2 auto switches Different surfaces Note 1) Same surface Note 1) A
Auto switch model Auto switch D-M9(V) B D-M9W(V) D-M9A(V) The proper auto switch mounting position is 5.5 mm inward The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a direction from the switch holder edge. (cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the auto switch The above A and B indicate values for band mounting in the table of page 1253. and lead wire do not interfere with each other. D-M9/M9W/M9A Less than 20 stroke Note 2) Less than 55 stroke Note 2) D-A90/A93 — Less than 50 stroke Note 2) Note 2) Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting in styles other than those in Note 1. Note 3) The dimensions stated in ( ) shows the minimum stroke for the auto switch mounting when the auto switch does not project from the end surface of the cylinder body and hinder the lead wire bending space. (Refer to the figure below.) These contents apply to the rail mounting with one or two auto switches.
1254 Auto Switch Mounting Series CJ2X
Operating Range Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Part No.
(mm) Bore size (mm) Auto switch Bore size Auto switch model Auto switch model 10 16 mounting ø10 ø16 D-A9/A9V 6 7 Note 1), Note 2) Note 1), Note 2) qBJ2-010 wBJ3-1 qBJ2-016 wBJ3-1 D-M9/M9V D-M9W/M9WV 2.5 3 c Switch bracket D-M9A/M9AV (Resin) D-C7/C80/C73C/C80C 7 7 d D-H7/H7W Band mounting 4 4 Switch holder D-H7NF (Zinc die-casted) D-H7C 8 9 D-A9 b 6 6.5 D-A9/A9V D-M9 Auto switch mounting screw D-M9/M9V D-M9W Band D-M9W/M9WV 3 3.5 mounting D-M9A/M9AV a D-A7 /A80/A7H/A80H 8 9 Auto switch mounting band D-A73C/A80C qBJ2-: A set of a and b in the figure. D-A79W 11 13 wBJ-1: A set of c and d in the figure. Rail mounting D-F7/J79/F7W/J79W BJ4-1 (Switch bracket: White) D-F7 V/F7 WV/F79F BJ5-1 (Switch bracket: Transparent) 5 5 D-J79C D-F7NT D-C7/C80 D-C73C/C80C BJ2-010 BJ2-016 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant D-H7 /H7 W to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) D-H7NF There may be the case it will vary substantially Note 3) Note 3) depending on an ambient environment. BQ2-012 BQ2-012
D-A9 D-A9V D-M9 Rail D-M9V BQ2-012 mounting D-M9W D-M9WV D-M9A D-M9AV
Note 1) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are used as a set. REA Note 2) Auto switch mounting brackets are shipped together with cylinders. Note 3) When mounting a compact auto switch on the ø10 or ø16 rail mounting type, order auto switch mounting bracket shown in the table above. Order it separately from the cylinder. REB Example CDJ2BX10-60-A ····· 1 unit D-M9BWV ····· 2 pcs. REC BQ2-012 ····· 2 pcs. Note 4) For the D-M9A (V) type auto switch, do not install the switch bracket on the indicator light. CY CX Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. MQ Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features D-C73, C76 — RHC Reed D-C80 Without indicator light Grommet (in-line) D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B — RZQ Solid state D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 to 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911.
D- -X 1255 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CUX ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25, ø32
How to Order
CUX 10 30 D
With auto switch CDUX 10 30 D M9BW Number of With auto switch auto switches (Built-in magnet) Nil 2 pcs. S 1 pc. Low speed cylinder Auto switch Bore size Nil Without auto switch 10 10 mm ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the table below. 16 16 mm 20 20 mm 25 25 mm Action 32 32 mm D Double acting
Port thread type Standard stroke (mm) Symbol Type Bore size 10, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 M5 x 0.8 ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25 20, 25, 32 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 Nil Rc 1/8 ø32 TN NPT 1/8 ø32 TF G 1/8 ø32 Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the auto switch. (Example) CDUX20-25D
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 Applicable load entry (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line connector
Indicator light (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) 3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N 5 V, 12 V IC circuit — 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P 2-wire 12 V M9BV M9B — 3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay, Grommet Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW (2-color indication) PLC 2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW — Solid state auto switch 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗ Water resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) ∗∗ ∗∗ (2-color indication) M9PAV M9PA 2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗ — 3-wire — 5 V — A96V A96 — — — IC circuit — Yes (NPN equivalent) — Grommet
Reed 100 V A93V A93 — — — Relay, 2-wire 24 V 12 V
auto switch No 100 V or less A90V A90 — — — IC circuit PLC ∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 1260 for details. ∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. ∗ Auto switches are shipped together (not assembled).
1256 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CUX
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 10 16 20 25 32 Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.05 MPa Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing) Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) ø10, ø16: 1 to 300 mm/s Piston speed ø20 to ø32: 0.5 to 300 mm/s Cushion Rubber bumper on both ends Rod end thread Male thread +1.0 Note) Stroke length tolerance 0 Mounting Basic style +1.0 Note) Tolerance 0
Symbol Minimum Operating Pressure Double acting, Single rod/Rubber bumper
Bore size (mm) 10 16 20 25 32 Min. operating pressure (MPa) 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.05
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) 10, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 20, 25, 32 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions. REA Mounting Maintenance REB Caution Caution 1. Tightening the cylinder beyond the 1. Replacement parts/Seal kit REC range of the indicated torque (shown in Order it in accordance with the bore the table below) may affect operation. size. CY Apply Loctite® (no. 242, Blue) to the Bore size mounting threads. Kit no. Contents (mm) CX Bore size Hexagon socket Proper tightening torque 16 CUX16-PS Piston seal: 1 pc. (mm) head (mm) (N·m) (Cylinder body) 20 CUX20-PS Rod seal: 1 pc. MQ 10 M3 0.54 ±10% 25 CUX25-PS Gasket: 1 pc. 16 M4 1.23 ±10% 32 CUX32-PS Grease pack (10 g): 1 pc. RHC 20, 25 M5 2.55 ±10% ∗ It is impossible to replace seals in bore 32 M6 4.02 ±10% size 10 mm. RZQ Operating Precautions 2. Grease pack When maintenance requires only grease, Warning use the following part numbers to order. 1. It might not be able to control CUX10 by Grease pack part no.: meter-out at a low speed operation. GR-L-005 (5 g) GR-L-010 (10 g) Caution GR-L-150 (150 g) 1. For CUX10, up to 0.1 N L/min (ANR) of internal leakage is anticipated due to cylinder structure. D- -X 1257 Series CUX
Dimensions: Double Acting, Single Rod
ø10
2 x ø P through 2 x M5 x 0.8 Rod end nut
4 x NN
2 x øP through 4 x øT counterbore Auto switch S + Stroke Z + Stroke
ø16 to ø32 2 x øP through 2 x M5 x 0.8 (ø32: Rc 1/8) Rod end nut
Rod End Nut/Accessory
4 x NN
Material: Carbon steel Applicable Width across Part no. d H1 B1 1 bore (mm) C flats L 2 x øP through NTP-010 10 M4 x 0.7 2.4 7 8.1 4 x øT counterbore NTJ-015A 16 M5 x 0.8 4 8 9.2 S + Stroke Auto switch NT-015A 20 M6 x 1.0 5 10 11.5 Z + Stroke NT-02 25 M8 x 1.25 5 13 15.0 NT-03 32 M10 x 1.25 6 17 19.6
(mm) Bore size A A’ B C D E GA GB H J K L MM NN P Q QA (mm) 10 10 — 15 24 4 7 16.5 10 16 11 18 — M4 x 0.7 M3 x 0.5 depth 5 3.2 — — 16 11 12.5 20 32 6 7 16.5 Note) 11.5 16 14 25 5 M5 x 0.8 M4 x 0.7 depth 6 4.5 4 2 20 12 14 26 40 8 9 19 12.5 19 16 30 6 M6 x 1.0 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 5.5 9 4.5 25 15.5 18 32 50 10 10 21.5 13 23 20 38 8 M8 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 5.5 9 4.5 32 19.5 22 40 62 12 11 23 12.5 27 24 48 10 M10 x 1.25 M6 x 1.0 depth 9 6.6 13.5 4.5
Without auto switch With auto switch Note) 5 stroke (CUX16-5D): 14.5 mm Bore size R T (mm) S Z S Z 10 9 6 depth 5 36 52 36 52 16 12 7.6 depth 6.5 30 46 40 56 20 16 9.3 depth 8 36 55 46 65 25 20 9.3 depth 9 40 63 50 73 32 24 11 depth 11.5 42 69 52 79
1258 Series CUX Auto Switch Mounting 1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
D-A9 D-M9 D-M9W D-M9A
( ): Denotes the values of D-A93.
D-A9V D-M9V D-M9WV D-M9AV 20 (22)
7.5(5)
( ): Denotes the values of D-A9V.
CDU Double Acting, Single Rod (mm) REA Bore size D-A9, D-A9V D-M9, D-M9W D-M9V, D-M9WV D-M9A D-M9AV (mm) A B W A B W A B W A B W A B W REB 10 12.5 3.5 (-1.5)1 16.5 7.5 2.5 16.5 7.5 0.5 16.5 7.5 4.5 16.5 7.5 2.5 16 16 4 (-2)0.5 20 8 1.5 20 8 -0.5 20 8 3.5 20 8 1.5 REC 20 20 6 (-4)-1.5 24 10 0 24 10 -2 24 10 2 24 10 0 25 22.5 7 (-5.5)-3 26.5 11 -1.5 26.5 11 -3.5 26.5 11 0.5 26.5 11 -1.5 CY 32 23.5 8.5 (-6.5)-4 27.5 12.5 -2.5 27.5 12.5 -4.5 27.5 12.5 -0.5 27.5 12.5 -2.5 C X Note 1) Figures in the table above are used as a reference when mounting the auto switches for stroke end detection. In the case of actually setting the auto switches, adjust them after confirming their operation. Note 2) Negative figures in the table W indicate an auto switch is mounted inward from the edge of the cylinder body. MQ Note 3) In the case of the 5 stroke or the 10 stroke, there are times in which the auto switch will not turn OFF or 2 auto switches will turn ON simultaneously due to their movement range. Therefore, set the position approximately 1 to 4 mm outward from the values given in the table above. Then, perform an operation inspection to make sure that the auto switches operate normally (if 1 auto switch is used, make sure that it turns ON and OFF properly; if 2 auto switches are used, make sure that both auto switches turn ON). RHC Note 4) ( ) in column W is the dimensions of D-A96. RZQ
Operating Range (mm) Bore size (mm) Auto switch model 10 16 20 25 32 D-A9, A9V 6 9 11 12.5 14 D-M9, M9V D-M9W, M9WV 4 5.5 7 7 7.5 D-M9A, M9AV ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. D- (assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment. -X 1259 Series CUX Auto Switch Mounting 2
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911.
Caution on Proximity Installation
When free mounting cylinders equipped with auto switches are used, Bore size (mm) Mounting pitch L (mm) the auto switches could activate unintentionally if the installed distance is less than the dimensions shown in the table. Therefore, make sure to 10 30 provide a greater clearance. Due to unavoidable circumstances, if they 16 33 must be used with less distance than the dimensions given in the 20 40 table, the cylinders must be shielded. Therefore, affix a steel plate or a 25 46 magnetic shielding plate (MU-S025) to the area on the cylinder that corresponds to the adjacent auto switch. (Please contact SMC for 32 56 details.) Auto switches may malfunction if a shield plate is not used.
Dimensions of shielding plate (MU-S025) that is sold separately L are indicated as reference. 18
36
Material: Ferrite stainless steel, Thickness: 0.3 mm Since the back side is treated with adhesive, it is possible to attach to the cylinder.
1260 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CQSX ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25
How to Order CQSX B 20 30 D
With auto switch CDQSX B 20 30 D M9BW
With auto switch Number of auto switches (Built-in magnet) Nil 2 pcs. S 1 pc. Low speed cylinder n “n” pcs.
Mounting style Auto switch B Through-hole/ Both ends tapped common (Standard) Nil Without auto switch Note) L Foot style Bore size ∗ For the applicable auto switch F Rod side flange style 12 12 mm model, refer to the table below. G Head side flange style 16 16 mm D Double clevis style 20 20 mm Cushion/Rod end thread ∗ Mounting brackets are shipped together (not assembled). 25 25 mm Note) A compact foot style with the overall width shortened is Nil Standard (Rod end female thread) newly added. For details, refer to page 1294. C With rubber bumper M Rod end male thread Combination above is possible. Standard stroke (mm) ∗ Bore size Standard stroke 12, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 Action Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model D Double acting 20, 25 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto • Manufacturing of intermediate stroke switch is required, there is no need to enter Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval are available by using spacers with standard stroke cylinders. The overall length of cylinder the symbol for the auto switch. will be the same as the standard stroke with a longer one. (Example) CDQSXL25-30D Example) 3 mm width spacer is installed in the standard cylinder REA CQSXB25-50D to make CQSXB25-47D. REB Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 Applicable load REC entry (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line connector
Indicator light (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) 3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N 5 V, 12 V IC circuit CY — 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P 2-wire 12 V M9BV M9B — CX 3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) M9PWV M9PW Relay, (2-color indication) Grommet Yes 24 V — MQ 2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW — PLC
Solid state 3-wire (NPN) ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ auto switch M9NAV M9NA Water resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ RHC (2-color indication) M9PAV M9PA 2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗∗ M9BA∗∗∗ — Magnetic field resistant ∗∗ (2-color indication) 2-wire (Non-polar) — — P3DW — RZQ 3-wire — 5 V — A96V A96 — — — IC circuit — Yes (NPN equivalent) — Grommet
Reed 100 V A93V A93 — — — Relay, 2-wire 24 V 12 V
auto switch No 100 V or less A90V A90 — — — IC circuit PLC ∗∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗∗ D-P3DW is compatible with ø25. 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL It is mounted away from the port side to avoid interference with fittings. 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 1267 for details. D- ∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. For D-P3DW, refer to pages 1948 and 1949. ∗ Auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). Note) D-A9V/M9V/M9WV/M9AV auto switches may not be mounted depending on the cylinder stroke or fitting size for piping. Consult with SMC separately. -X 1261 Series CQSX
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 Type Pneumatic (Non-lube) Action Double acting, Single rod Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (No freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing) Cushion None, Rubber bumper Rod end thread Female thread +1.0 Note) Stroke length tolerance 0 ø12, ø16: 1 to 300 mm/s Piston speed ø20, ø25: 0.5 to 300 mm/s Note) Stroke length tolerance does not include the amount of bumper change.
Minimum Operating Pressure
Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 Min. operating pressure (MPa) 0.03 0.03 0.025 0.025 Symbol
Single rod/Without cushion Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Single rod/Rubber bumper Retaining Ring Installation/Removal Maintenance Caution Caution 1.For installation and removal, use an 1. Replacement parts/Seal kit appropriate pair of pliers (tool for Order it in accordance with the bore installing a type C retaining ring). size. 2. Even if a proper plier (tool for installing Bore size type C retaining ring) is used, it is likely Kit no. Contents (mm) to inflict damage to a human body or peripheral equipment, as a retaining ring 12 CQSX12-PS Piston seal: 1 pc. may be flown out of the tip of a plier (tool 16 CQSX16-PS Rod seal: 1 pc. for installing a type C retaining ring). Be 20 CQSX20-PS Tube gasket: 1 pc. much careful with the popping of a 25 CQSX25-PS Grease pack (10 g): 1 pc. retaining ring. Besides, be certain that a 2. Grease pack retaining ring is placed firmly into the When maintenance requires only groove of rod cover before supplying air grease, use the following part numbers at the time of installment. to order. Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g) GR-L-010 (10 g) GR-L-150 (150 g)
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (1) (mm) Foot Flange Double clevis 12 CQS-L012 CQS-F012 CQS-D012 16 CQS-L016 CQS-F016 CQS-D016 20 CQS-L020 CQS-F020 CQS-D020 25 CQS-L025 CQS-F025 CQS-D025 Note 1) When ordering foot bracket, order 2 pieces per cylinder. Note 2) Parts belonging to each bracket are as follows. Foot or Flange: Body mounting bolts Double clevis: Clevis pin, Type C retaining ring for shaft, Body mounting bolts
1262 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CQSX
Mounting Bolt for CQSX/Without Auto Switch
Mounting method: Mounting bolt for through-hole Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. mounting style of CQSXB is available as an option. CQSXB12-5D 25 CQ-M3 x 25 L CQSXB20-30D 50 CQ-M5 x 50 L Refer to the following for ordering procedures. CQSXB00-10D 30 x 30 L CQSXB00-35D 55 x 55 L Order the actual number of bolts that will be used. CQSXB00-15D 35 x 35 L CQSXB00-40D 6.5 60 x 60 L 6.5 Example) CQ-M3x25 L 4 pcs. CQSXB00-20D 40 x 40 L CQSXB00-45D 65 x 65 L CQSXB00-25D 45 x 45 L CQSXB00-50D 70 x 70 L CQSXB00-30D 50 x 50 L CQSXB25-5D 30 CQ-M5 x 30 L Mounting bolt CQSXB16-5D 25 CQ-M3 x 25 L CQSXB00-10D 35 x 35 L CQSXB00-10D 30 x 30 L CQSXB00-15D 40 x 40 L CQSXB00-15D 35 x 35 L CQSXB00-20D 45 x 45 L 6.5 CQSXB00-20D 40 x 40 L CQSXB00-25D 50 x 50 L 8.5 CQSXB00-25D 45 x 45 L CQSXB00-30D 55 x 55 L CQSXB00-30D 50 x 50 L CQSXB00-35D 60 x 60 L Note) The appropriate plain washer must be used for CQSXB20-5D 25 CQ-M5 x 25 L CQSXB00-40D 65 x 65 L through-hole mounting. CQSXB00-10D 30 x 30 L CQSXB00-45D 70 x 70 L CQSXB00-15D 6.5 35 x 35 L CQSXB00-50D 75 x 75 L CQSXB00-20D 40 x 40 L Material: Chromium molybdenum steel CQSXB00-25D 45 x 45 L Surface material: Zinc chromated
Mounting Bolt for CDQSX/With Auto Switch
Mounting method: Mounting bolt for through-hole Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. Cylinder model CD Mounting bolt part no. mounting style of CDQSXB is available as an option. CDQSXB12-5D 30 CQ-M3 x 30 L CDQSXB20-30D 60 CQ-M5 x 60 L Refer to the following for ordering procedures. 10D 35 x 35 L 35D 65 x 65 L Order the actual number of bolts that will be used. 15D 40 x 40 L 40D 6.5 70 x 70 L 6.5 Example) CQ-M3x30 L 4 pcs. 20D 45 x 45 L 45D 75 x 75 L 25D 50 x 50 L 50D 80 x 80 L REA Mounting bolt 30D 55 x 55 L CDQSXB25-5D 40 CQ-M5 x 40 L CDQSXB16-5D 30 CQ-M3 x 30 L 10D 45 x 45 L REB 10D 35 x 35 L 15D 50 x 50 L REC 15D 40 x 40 L 20D 55 x 55 L 6.5 20D 45 x 45 L 25D 60 x 60 L 8.5 CY 25D 50 x 50 L 30D 65 x 65 L 30D 55 x 55 L 35D 70 x 70 L C X Note) The appropriate plain washer must be used for through-hole mounting. CDQSXB20-5D 35 CQ-M5 x 35 L 40D 75 x 75 L 10D 40 x 40 L 45D 80 x 80 L MQ 15D 45 x 45 L 50D 85 x 85 L 6.5 RHC 20D 50 x 50 L Material: Chromium molybdenum steel 25D 55 x 55 L Surface material: Zinc chromated RZQ Accessory
For accessory bracket for Series CQS, refer to page 1274, since it is commonly used with Series CQ2.
• Single knuckle joint • Pin for knuckle • Double knuckle joint • Rod end nut
D- -X 1263 Series CQSX
Dimensions: ø12 to ø25 ∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 1266.
Basic style (Through-hole/Both ends tapped common): CQSXB/CDQSXB
ø12
Auto switch Minimum lead wire ø16 2 x 4 x øOB counterbore H thread effective depth C 2 x M5 x 0.8 bending radius 10 depth RB 2 x 4 x OA effective depth RA Note 1) 4 x øN through
Flat washer 4 pcs.
B + Stroke A + Stroke ø20, ø25
Rod end male thread
Width across flats B1 MM
SMC
H1
C1 X L1
Rod End Male Thread (mm) Bore size B1 C1 H1 L1 MM X (mm) • Length with intermediate stroke 12 8 9 4 14 M5 x 0.8 10.5 Spacer ··· The dimensions will be identical to those of the 16 10 10 5 15.5 M6 x 1.0 12 nearest long stroke. 20 13 12 5 18.5 M8 x 1.25 14 25 17 15 6 22.5 M10 x 1.25 17.5
Basic Style (mm) Standard Bore size Without auto switch With auto switch stroke C D E F H I K L M N OA OB Q RA RB T (mm) (mm) AB AB 12 5 to 30 20.5 17 25.5 22 6 6 25 5 M3 x 0.5 32 5 3.5 15.5 3.5 M4 x 0.7 6.5 7.5 7 4 0.5 16 5 to 30 20.5 17 25.5 22 8 8 29 5 M4 x 0.7 38 6 3.5 20 3.5 M4 x 0.7 6.5 7.5 7 4 0.5 20 5 to 50 24 19.5 34 29.5 7 10 36 5.5 M5 x 0.8 47 8 4.5 25.5 5.4 M6 x 1.0 9 9 10 7 1 25 5 to 50 27.5 22.5 37.5 32.5 12 12 40 5.5 M6 x 1.0 52 10 5 28 5.4 M6 x 1.0 9 11 10 7 1 Note 1) For the following bore/stroke sizes through-hole is threaded over the entire length: Basic style ø12 and ø16; 5 stroke, ø20; 5 to 15 stroke, ø25; 5 to 10 stroke, ø20 with auto switch built-in magnet; 5 stroke. Note 2) Rubber bumper type has the same dimensions as those indicated above. ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274.
1264 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CQSX
Foot style: CQSXL/CDQSXL Foot Style Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch L B + Stroke Special cap bolt L L1 (mm) stroke (mm) A B LS A B LS 12 5 to 30 35.3 17 5 40.3 22 10 13.5 24 16 5 to 30 35.3 17 5 40.3 22 10 13.5 25.5 LY 20 5 to 50 41.2 19.5 7.5 51.2 29.5 17.5 14.5 28.5 LH 25 5 to 50 44.7 22.5 7.5 54.7 32.5 17.5 15 32.5
LX 4 x øLD X Y LT Y X LG Bore size LD LG LH LT LX LY LZ X Y LZ LS + Stroke (mm) A + Stroke 12 4.5 2.8 17 2 34 29.5 44 8 4.5 Rod end male thread 16 4.5 2.8 19 2 38 33.5 48 8 5 20 6.6 4 24 3.2 48 42 62 9.2 5.8 25 6.6 4 26 3.2 52 46 66 10.7 5.8 Foot bracket material: Carbon steel Surface treatment: Nickel plated L1
Rod Side Flange Style Rod side flange style: CQSXF/CDQSXF Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch FD FT FV FX (mm) stroke (mm) A B A B 12 5 to 30 30.5 17 35.5 22 4.5 5.5 25 45 16 5 to 30 30.5 17 35.5 22 4.5 5.5 30 45 20 5 to 50 34 19.5 44 29.5 6.6 8 39 48 25 5 to 50 37.5 22.5 47.5 32.5 6.6 8 42 52
2 x øFD B + Stroke Bore size FZ L L1 A + Stroke (mm) 12 55 13.5 24 16 55 13.5 25.5 Rod end male thread 20 60 14.5 28.5 25 64 15 32.5 Flange bracket material: Carbon steel Surface treatment: Nickel plated Rod end nut ∗
Head side flange style: CQSXG/CDQSXG Head Side Flange Style (mm) Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch (mm) stroke (mm) A BAB 12 5 to 30 26 17 31 22 16 5 to 30 26 17 31 22 REA 20 5 to 50 32 19.5 42 29.5 B + Stroke 2 x øFD 25 5 to 50 35.5 22.5 45.5 32.5 A + Stroke REB Bore size FD FT FV FX FZ L L1 Rod end male thread (mm) REC 12 4.5 5.5 25 45 55 3.5 14 16 4.5 5.5 30 45 55 3.5 15.5 20 6.6 8 39 48 60 4.5 18.5 CY 25 6.6 8 42 52 64 5 22.5 Flange bracket material: Carbon steel C X ∗ Rod end nut Surface treatment: Nickel plated MQ Double clevis style: CQSXD/CDQSXD Double Clevis Style (mm) RHC Cap bolt Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch (mm) stroke (mm) A B CL A B CL øCD hole H10 RZQ Axis d9 12 5 to 30 40.5 17 34.5 45.5 22 39.5 16 5 to 30 41.5 17 35.5 46.5 22 40.5 20 5 to 50 51 19.5 42 61 29.5 52 25 5 to 50 57.5 22.5 47.5 67.5 32.5 57.5 B + Stroke Bore size CL + Stroke CB CD CT CU CW CX CZ L L1 RR A + Stroke (mm) 12 12 5 4 7 14 5 10 3.5 14 6 Rod end male thread 16 14 5 4 10 15 6.5 12 3.5 15.5 6 20 20 8 5 12 18 8 16 4.5 18.5 9 25 24 10 5 14 20 10 20 5 22.5 10 Double clevis bracket material: Carbon steel Surface treatment: Nickel plated D- Rod end nut ∗ ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. -X 1265 Series CQSX Auto Switch Mounting
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm)
Qty. of auto switches D-M9WV D-M9W D-M9V D-A9V D-A9 D-M9 D-P3DW Note 1) mounted D-M9AV D-M9A
1 pc. 5 5 10 10(5) 15 (10) 15 (5) 15 2 pcs. 5 10 10 10 15 (10) 15 (5) 15 Note 1) ø25 is only applicable for D-P3DW. Note 2) The dimensions stated in ( ) shows the minimum stroke for the auto switch mounting when the auto switch does not project from the end surface of the cylinder body and hinder the lead wire bending space. (Refer to the figure on the right.) Order auto switches separately.
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
ø12 Mounting ø16 to ø25 Mounting D-A9 a) b) a) b)
D-A9V D-M9V D-M9WV D-M9A ≅ ≅
D-M9 D-M9W D-M9AV
D-P3DW ø25 ≅Hs B
A Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position Auto switch D-M9V/M9WV D-A9 D-A9V D-M9/M9W D-M9A D-P3DW model D-M9AV Bore size ABW ABA Hs BW A BW AB Hs A B Hs
12 1.5 0 [1.5] 4 1.5 0 17 5.5 3.5 5.5 5.5 3.5 7.5 5.5 4.5 19.5 — — —
16 2 0 [2] 4.5 2 0 19 6 4 6 6 4 8 6 4 21.5 — — — 20 6 3.5 [−1.5] 1 6 3.5 22.5 10 7.5 2.5 10 7.5 4.5 10 7.5 25 — — — 25 7 5.5 [−3.5] −1 7 5.5 24.5 11 9.5 0.5 11 9.5 2.5 11 9.5 27 1.5 0 32 [ ]: Denotes the values of D-A96. Note 1) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting. Note 2) The product is shipped out of the factory in installation state “a)”. To change the electrical entry direction of the switch on the head, refer to installation state “b)”. Note 3) Negative figures for W indicate an auto switch is mounted inward from the edge of the cylinder body. 1266 Auto Switch Mounting Series CQSX
Operating Range
(mm) Bore size Auto switch model 12 16 20 25 D-A9/A9V 6 7.5 10 10 D-M9/M9V D-M9W/M9WV 3 4 5.5 4.5 D-M9A/M9AV D-P3DW ——— 5.5 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 to 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911.
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
• If the cylinder is used in an application in which a magnetic material is placed in close contact around the cylinder as shown in the graph on the right (including cases in which even one of the sides is in close contact) the operation of auto switches could become unstable. Therefore, please check with SMC for this type of application. Magnetic substance Magnetic substance (Iron plate, etc.) (Iron plate, etc.)
REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1267 Low Speed Cylinder: Standard Type Double Acting, Single Rod Series CQ2X ø32, ø40, ø50, ø63, ø80, ø100
How to Order CQ2X B 40 30 D
With auto switch CDQ2X B 40 30 D M9BW
Number of auto switches With auto switch Nil 2 pcs. (Built-in magnet) S 1 pc. n “n” pcs. Low speed cylinder Auto switch Mounting style Nil Without auto switch B Through-hole (Standard) F Rod side flange style ∗ For the applicable auto switch A Both ends tapped style G Head side flange style model, refer to the table below. L Foot style Note) D Double clevis style ∗ Mounting brackets are shipped together (not assembled). Cushion/Rod end thread Note) A compact foot style with the overall width shortened is Nil Standard (Rod end female thread) newly added. For details, refer to page 1294. Action C With rubber bumper Bore size D Double acting M Rod end male thread Port thread type ∗ Combination above is possible. 32 32 mm Nil Rc 40 40 mm Standard stroke (mm) TN NPT ø32 to ø100 50 50 mm Refer to “Standard Stroke” on Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model TF G page 1269. 63 63 mm If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto ∗ Without auto switch, ø32, 5 strokes: switch is required, there is no need to enter 80 80 mm M thread 100 100 mm The symbol is Nil when ordering the the symbol for the auto switch. M thread. (Example) CDQ2XL32-50D
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None Applicable load entry (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line connector (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N) Indicator light 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, M9NV M9N — IC circuit Grommet 3-wire (PNP) 12 V M9PV M9P — — M9BV M9B — 2-wire 12V — Connector J79C — — — 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, M9NWV M9NW — Diagnostic indication IC circuit 3-wire (PNP) 12 V M9PWV M9PW — (2-color indication) Relay, Yes 2-wire 24 V 12 V — M9BWV M9BW — — PLC 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗∗ M9NA∗∗∗ — Water resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗∗ M9PA∗∗∗ — (2-color indication) 2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗∗ M9BA∗∗∗ — —
Solid state auto switch With diagnostic output (2-color indication) 4-wire 5 V, 12 V — F79F — — IC circuit Magnetic field resistant 2-wire — P3DW — — — — (2-color indication) (Non-polar) — P4DW∗∗ — — — 3-wire 5 V — A96V A96 — — — — IC circuit — (NPN equivalent) — Yes Grommet — 200 V A72 A72H — — — — — — 12 V 100 V A93V A93 — — — No 5 V, 12 V 100 V or less A90V A90 — — — — IC circuit Relay, 2-wire Yes 24 V 12 V — A73C — — — — PLC Connector No 5 V, 12 V 24 V or less A80C — — — IC circuit Reed auto switch Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet Yes — — A79W — — — — — — ∗∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance. Consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers. ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗ D-P4DW is compatible with ø40 to ø100. 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL ∗ Only D-P4DW is assembled at the time of shipment. 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ None ············ N (Example) J79CN ∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 1279 for details. ∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1960 and 1961. For D-P3DW, refer to pages 1948 and 1949. ∗ When D-A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V) types M9A(V) with ø32 to ø50 are mounted on a side other than the port side, order auto switch mounting brackets separately. Refer to page 1278 for details. ∗ Auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). 1268 Low Speed Cylinder: Standard Type Double Acting, Single Rod Series CQ2X
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Type Pneumatic (Non-lube) Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa Without auto switch: –10 to 70 C (No freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature ° With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing) Cushion None, Rubber bumper Rod end thread Female thread +1.0 mm Note) Stroke length tolerance 0 Mounting Through-hole Symbol Piston speed 0.5 to 300 mm/s Single rod/Without cushion Note) Stroke length tolerance does not include the amount of bumper change.
Minimum Operating Pressure
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 Single rod/Rubber bumper Min. operating pressure (MPa) 0.025 0.01
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) • Manufacturing of Intermediate stroke Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval are available 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, by using spacers with standard stroke cylinders. But, 32, 40 40, 45, 50, 75, 100 as for ø40 to ø100 with damper, please consult with SMC separately. 50, 63 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, Example) 18 mm width spacer is installed in the 80, 100 40, 45, 50, 75, 100 standard cylinder CQ2XB40-75D to make CQ2XB40-57D.
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for REA Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions. REB Retaining Ring Installation/Removal Maintenance REC Caution Caution CY 1. For installation and removal, use an 1. Replacement parts/Seal kit appropriate pair of pliers (tool for Order it in accordance with the bore size. CX installing a type C retaining ring). Bore size Kit no. Contents 2. Even if a proper plier (tool for installing (mm) type C retaining ring) is used, it is likely 32 CQ2X32-PS MQ to inflict damage to a human body or Piston seal: 1 pc. Mounting Bracket Part No. peripheral equipment, as a retaining ring 40 CQ2X40-PS Bore size (3) Rod seal: 1 pc. RHC Foot (1) Flange Double clevis may be flown out of the tip of a plier 50 CQ2X50-PS (mm) (tool for installing a type C retaining 63 CQ2X63-PS 32 CQ-L032 CQ-F032 CQ-D032 ring). Be much careful with the popping Gasket: 1 pc. RZQ 40 CQ-L040 CQ-F040 CQ-D040 of a retaining ring. Besides, be certain 80 CQ2X80-PS 50 CQ-L050 CQ-F050 CQ-D050 Grease pack (10 g): 1 pc. that a retaining ring is placed firmly into 100 CQ2X100-PS 63 CQ-L063 CQ-F063 CQ-D063 the groove of rod cover before supplying 80 CQ-L080 CQ-F080 CQ-D080 air at the time of installment. 2. Grease pack 100 CQ-L100 CQ-F100 CQ-D100 When maintenance requires only grease, use the following part numbers to order. Note 1) When ordering foot bracket, order 2 pieces per cylinder. Pneumatic Circuit Grease pack part no.: Note 2) Parts belonging to each bracket are as 1. Pressure supplied to cylinder should be GR-L-005 (5 g) follows. set affordably. When the operating GR-L-010 (10 g) Foot or Flange: Body mounting bolts pressure is low, low speed operation GR-L-150 (150 g) Double clevis: Clevis pin, Type C retaining ring for shaft, Body mounting may not be stable depending on a load bolts condition. Besides, the maximum speed D- Note 3) For double clevis style, clevis pin and may be restricted depending on a retaining ring are shipped together. pneumatic circuit, or operating pressure. -X 1269 Series CQ2X Bore size ø32 to ø50
Both ends tapped style: CQ2XA/CDQ2XA
O1 thread R R Both ends tapped (mm) Basic style (Through hole type): Bore size O1 R CQ2XB/CDQ2XB (mm) Minimum lead wire bending radius 10 32 M6 x 1.0 10 H thread effective 4 x øN through Auto switch 40 M6 x 1.0 10 depth C 8 x øO counterbore Q F 50 M8 x 1.25 14 øI 2 x P (Rc, NPT, G) (Port size) D Z E M ø
K LB + Stroke M A + Stroke E J W
Rod end male thread
MM
Rod End Male Thread (mm)
Width across flats B1 Bore size B1 C1 H1 L1 MM X H1 (mm) C1 32 22 20.5 8 28.5 M14 x 1.5 23.5 X 40 22 20.5 8 28.5 M14 x 1.5 23.5 L1 50 27 26 11 33.5 M18 x 1.5 28.5
Basic Style For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 1276. (mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch C D E H I J K L M (mm) (mm) A B F P Q A B F P Q 5 5.5 M5 x 0.8 11.5 32 10 to 50 30 23 40 33 7.5 1/8 10.5 13 16 45 M8 x 1.25 60 4.5 14 7 34 7.5 1/8 10.5 75, 100 40 33 5 to 50 40 36.5 29.5 8 11 46.5 39.5 8 1/8 11 13 16 52 M8 x 1.25 69 5 14 7 40 75, 100 46.5 39.5 1/8 10 to 50 38.5 30.5 50 48.5 40.5 10.5 1/4 10.5 15 20 64 M10 x 1.5 86 7 17 8 50 75, 100 48.5 40.5 10.5 1/4 10.5
Bore size Note 1) Dimensions for rubber bumper are same as the standard style above. (mm) N O S U W Z ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. Note 2) Refer to page 1269 for calculation of the longitudinal dimension of the intermediate 32 5.5 9 depth 7 58.5 31.5 49.5 14 strokes since there is the spacer-installed type.
40 5.5 9 depth 7 66 35 57 14
50 6.6 11 depth 8 80 41 71 19
1270 Low Speed Cylinder: Standard Type Double Acting, Single Rod Series CQ2X
Foot Style (mm) Foot style: CQ2XL/CDQ2XL Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch L L1 LD (mm) stroke (mm) LB + Stroke A B LS A B LS 5 to 50 47.2 23 7 32 57.2 33 17 17 38.5 6.6 75, 100 57.2 33 17 Special cap 5 to 50 53.7 29.5 13.5 bolt 40 63.7 39.5 23.5 17 38.5 6.6
LY 75, 100 63.7 39.5 23.5 10 to 50 56.7 30.5 7.5 LH 50 66.7 40.5 17.5 18 43.5 9 75, 100 66.7 40.5 17.5 X Y Y X LG
4 x øLD LT LX Bore size Standard LG LH LT LX LY LZ X Y LZ LS + Stroke (mm) stroke (mm) A + Stroke 5 to 50 32 4 30 3.2 57 57 71 11.2 5.8 75, 100 Rod end male thread 5 to 50 40 4 33 3.2 64 64 78 11.2 7 75, 100 10 to 50 50 5 39 3.2 79 78 95 14.7 8 75, 100 L1 Foot bracket material: Carbon steel Surface treatment: Nickel plated Rod side flange style: CQ2XF/CDQ2XF Rod Side Flange Style (mm) Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch FD FT FV FX FZ (mm) stroke (mm) A B A B 5 to 50 40 23
M 32 50 33 5.5 8 48 56 65 FV 75, 100 50 33 5 to 50 46.5 29.5 40 56.5 39.5 5.5 8 54 62 72 FX 4 x øFD FT 75, 100 56.5 39.5 10 to 50 48.5 30.5 FZ LB + Stroke 50 58.5 40.5 6.6 9 67 76 89 A + Stroke 75, 100 58.5 40.5 Bore size Standard Foot bracket material: Carbon steel L L1 M Surface treatment: Nickel plated Rod end male thread (mm) stroke (mm) 5 to 50 32 17 38.5 34 75, 100 5 to 50 40 17 38.5 40 L1 75, 100 10 to 50 50 18 43.5 50 Head side flange style: CQ2XG/CDQ2XG 75, 100
Head Side Flange Style (mm) Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch L L1
M (mm) stroke (mm) FV A A REA 5 to 50 38 32 48 7 28.5 75, 100 48 L B + Stroke FT FX 4 x øFD REB 5 to 50 44.5 A + Stroke FZ 40 54.5 7 28.5 75, 100 54.5 REC 10 to 50 47.5 Rod end male thread 50 57.5 8 33.5 75, 100 57.5 ∗ Dimensions except A, L Foot bracket material: Carbon steel CY and L1 are the same as Head side flange style Surface treatment: Nickel plated Applicable to ( rod side flange style. ) Double clevis style CX Double Clevis Style (mm) L1 Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch CD CT CU (mm) stroke (mm) A B CL A B CL MQ 5 to 50 60 23 50 Double clevis style: CQ2XD/CDQ2XD 32 70 33 60 10 5 14 4 x N 75, 100 70 33 60 RHC CT 5 to 50 68.5 29.5 58.5 Cap bolt 40 78.5 39.5 68.5 10 6 14 75, 100 78.5 39.5 68.5 øCD hole H10 RZQ 10 to 50 80.5 30.5 66.5 Axis d9 50 90.5 40.5 76.5 14 7 20 75, 100 90.5 40.5 76.5 Bore size Standard CW CX CZ L L1 N RR CU +0.4 (mm) stroke (mm) CX +0.2 LB + Stroke RRCW –0.1 5 to 50 CZ –0.3 32 20 18 36 7 28.5 M6 x 1.0 10 CL + Stroke 75, 100 5 to 50 A + Stroke 40 22 18 36 7 28.5 M6 x 1.0 10 75, 100 Rod end male thread 10 to 50 50 28 22 44 8 33.5 M8 x 1.25 14 75, 100 Double clevis bracket material: Carbon steel D- Surface treatment: Painted ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. L1 ∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring are shipped together. -X 1271 Series CQ2X Bore size ø63 to ø100
Both ends tapped style: CQ2XA/CDQ2XA
O1 thread R R Both ends tapped (mm) Bore size O1 R (mm) 63 M10 x 1.5 18 Basic style (Through hole type): 80 M12 x 1.75 22 100 M12 x 1.75 22 H thread effective Minimum lead wire bending radius 10 depth C 4 x øN through Auto switch 8 x øO counterbore Q F 2 x P (Rc, NPT, G) øI (Port size) D Z E M ø
K LB + Stroke M A + Stroke E J W
Rod end male thread
MM Both ends tapped (mm) Bore size (mm) B1 C1 H1 L1 MM X Width across flats B1 27 26 11 33.5 M18 x 1.5 28.5 H1 63 32 32.5 13 43.5 M22 x 1.5 35.5 C1 80 X 100 41 32.5 16 43.5 M26 x 1.5 35.5 L1
Basic Style For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 1276. (mm) Bore size Stroke range Without auto switch With auto switch C D E F H I J K L M N P Q S (mm) (mm) A B A B O 10 to 50 44 36 63 75, 100 54 46 54 46 15 20 77 10.5 M10 x 1.5 103 7 17 8 60 9 14 depth 10.5 1/4 15 93 10 to 50 53.5 43.5 80 75, 100 63.5 53.5 63.5 53.5 21 25 98 12.5 M16 x 2.0 132 6 22 10 77 11 17.5 depth 13.5 3/8 16 112.5 10 to 50 65 53 100 75, 100 75 63 75 63 27 30 117 13 M20 x 2.5 156 6.5 27 12 94 11 17.5 depth 13.5 3/8 23 132.5 (mm) Note 1) Dimensions for rubber bumper are same as the standard style above. Bore size (mm) U W Z ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. Note 2) Refer to the Stroke Table on page 1269 for calculation of the longitudinal 63 47.5 84 19 dimension of the intermediate strokes. 80 57.5 104 26
100 67.5 123.5 26
1272 Low Speed Cylinder: Standard Type Double Acting, Single Rod Series CQ2X
Foot style: CQ2XL/CDQ2XL Head side flange style: CQ2XG/CDQ2XG LB + Stroke
Special cap M FV LY bolt LH
LB + Stroke FT FX LX 4 x øLD YX YX LG LT A + Stroke FZ LZ LS + Stroke A + Stroke 4 x øFD Rod end male thread Rod end male thread
L1 L1
Rod side flange style: CQ2XF/CDQ2XF Double clevis style: CQ2XD/CDQ2XD CT 4 x N Cap bolt øCD hole H10 Axis d9 M FV
FT CU +0.4 FX 4 x øFD CX +0.2 LB + Stroke CW RR –0.1 FZ LB + Stroke CZ –0.3 A + Stroke CL + Stroke A + Stroke
Rod end male thread Rod end male thread REA REB L1 L1 REC Foot Style (mm) Head Side Flange Style (mm) Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch ∗ Dimensions except CY L L1 LD LG LH LT (mm) stroke (mm) A B LS A B LS (mm) stroke (mm) A A L L1 A, L and L1 are the same as rod side 10 to 50 62.2 36 10 10 to 50 53 () 63 72.2 46 20 18 43.5 11 5 46 3.2 63 8 33.5 flange style. C X 75, 100 72.2 46 20 63 75, 100 63 10 to 50 10 to 50 80 75 43.5 13.5 85 53.5 23.5 20 53.5 13 7 59 4.5 64.5 74.5 10 43.5 75, 100 85 53.5 23.5 80 75, 100 74.5 10 to 50 10 to 50 MQ 100 88 53 19 98 63 29 22 53.5 13 7 71 6 76 86 12 43.5 75, 100 98 63 29 100 75, 100 86 Foot bracket material: Carbon steel Foot bracket material: Carbon steel RHC Bore size Standard Surface treatment: Nickel plated Double Clevis Style Surface treatment: Nickel plated (mm) (mm) stroke (mm) LX LY LZ X Y Bore size Without auto switch With auto switch 10 to 50 Standard 63 RZQ 75, 100 95 91.5 113 16.2 9 (mm) stroke (mm) A B CL A B CL CD CT CU CW CX 10 to 50 10 to 50 80 118 114 140 19.5 11 63 88 36 74 98 46 84 14 8 20 30 22 75, 100 75, 100 98 46 84 10 to 50 10 to 50 100 137 136 162 23 12.5 80 109.5 43.5 91.5 119.5 53.5 101.5 18 10 27 38 28 75, 100 75, 100 119.5 53.5 101.5 10 to 50 100 132 53 110 142 63 120 22 13 31 45 32 75, 100 142 63 120 Rod Side Flange Style (mm) Double clevis bracket material: Bore size Standard Without auto switch With auto switch Bore size Standard Cast iron FD FT FV FX FZ L L1 M (mm) stroke (mm) A B A B (mm) stroke (mm) CZ L L1 N RR Surface treatment: Painted 10 to 50 10 to 50 63 54 36 64 46 9 9 80 92 108 18 43.5 60 63 44 8 33.5 M10 x 1.5 14 75, 100 64 46 75, 100 10 to 50 10 to 50 80 63.5 43.5 73.5 53.5 11 11 99 116 134 20 53.5 77 80 56 10 43.5 M12 x 1.75 18 75, 100 73.5 53.5 75, 100 10 to 50 10 to 50 100 75 53 85 63 11 11 117 136 154 22 53.5 94 100 64 12 43.5 M12 x 1.75 22 D- 75, 100 85 63 75, 100 Foot bracket material: Carbon steel ∗ For details about the rod end nut and accessory brackets, refer to page 1274. Surface treatment: Nickel plated ∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring are shipped together. -X 1273 Series CQ2X Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint Double Knuckle Joint For I-G012, I-Z015A For I-G04, I-G05 For Y-G012, Y-Z015A For Y-G04, Y-G05 I-G02, I-G03 I-G08, I-G10 Y-G02, Y-G03 Y-G08, Y-G10
øND hole H10 øND hole H10 Axis d9 Axis d9 ø ø
Material: Carbon steel Material: Cast iron Material: Carbon steel Material: Cast iron Surface material: Nickel plated Surface material: Nickel plated Surface material: Nickel plated Surface material: Nickel plated (mm) (mm) Applicable Applicable Applicable R R Part no. bore size A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX Part no. bore size A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX NZ L pin (mm) (mm) part no. +0.058 –0.3 +0.058 +0.5 I-G04 32, 40 42 14 ø22 30 M14 x 1.5 12 14 10 0 18–0.5 Y-G04 32, 40 42 16 ø22 30 M14 x 1.5 12 14 10 0 18+0.3 36 41.6 IY-G04 +0.070 –0.3 +0.070 +0.5 I-G05 50, 63 56 18 ø28 40 M18 x 1.5 16 20 14 0 22–0.5 Y-G05 50, 63 56 20 ø28 40 M18 x 1.5 16 20 14 0 22+0.3 44 50.6 IY-G05 +0.070 –0.3 +0.070 +0.5 I-G08 80 71 21 ø38 50 M22 x 1.5 21 27 18 0 28–0.5 Y-G08 80 71 23 ø38 50 M22 x 1.5 21 27 18 0 28+0.3 56 64 IY-G08 +0.084 –0.3 +0.084 +0.5 I-G10 100 79 21 ø44 55 M26 x 1.5 24 31 22 0 32–0.5 Y-G10 100 79 24 ø44 55 M26 x 1.5 24 31 22 0 32+0.3 64 72 IY-G10 ∗ Knuckle pin and retaining ring are included.
Knuckle Pin (Common with double clevis pin) Rod End Nut ø ø
Material: Carbon steel Material: Carbon steel Surface material: Nickel plated (mm) (mm) Applicable Applicable Applicable bore Part no. bore size Dd9 L d L1 m t Part no. d H B C (mm) retaining ring size (mm) –0.040 IY-G04 32, 40 10–0.076 41.6 9.6 36.2 1.55 1.15 Type C 10 for axis NT-04 32, 40 M14 x 1.5 8 22 25.4 –0.050 IY-G05 50, 63 14–0.093 50.6 13.4 44.2 2.05 1.15 Type C 14 for axis NT-05 50, 63 M18 x 1.5 11 27 31.2 –0.050 IY-G08 80 18–0.093 64 17 56.2 2.55 1.35 Type C 18 for axis NT-08 80 M22 x 1.5 13 32 37.0 –0.065 IY-G10 100 22–0.117 72 21 64.2 2.55 1.35 Type C 22 for axis NT-10 100 M26 x 1.5 16 41 47.3 ∗ Type C retaining rings for axis are included.
1274 Accessory Bracket Dimensions Series CQ2X
Simple Joint: ø32 to ø100
Type A Mounting Bracket
U T1 2 x øD 2 V M W T
Joint F E B Joint and Mounting Bracket (Type A, Type B) Part No. Material: Chromium molybdenum steel (Nickel plated) (mm) Bore size Part no. B D E F M T1 T2 YA 03 (mm) YA-03 32,40 18 6.8 16 6 42 6.5 10 YA-05 50,63 20 9 20 8 50 6.5 12 Applicable air cylinder bore YA-08 80 26 11 25 10 62 8.5 16 03 For ø32, ø40 YA-10 100 31 14 30 12 76 10.5 18 Mounting bracket 05 For ø50, ø63 YA Type A mounting bracket 08 For ø80 Bore size Part no. U V W Weight (g) YB Type B mounting bracket 10 For ø100 (mm) YU Joint YA-03 32,40 6 18 56 55 YA-05 50,63 8 22 67 100 Allowable Eccentricity (mm) YA-08 80 10 28 83 195 YA-10 100 12 36 100 340 Bore size ø32 ø40 ø50 ø63 ø80 ø100 Eccentricity tolerance ±1 ±1.5 ±2 Type B Mounting Bracket Backlash 0.5
Bore size ø40 Part no. 2 V M W • Type A mounting bracket part no.······ YA-03 T • Joint··················································· YU-03 REA Joint Joint and Mounting Bracket (Type A, Type B) Part No. REB T1 Bore size Applicable mounting bracket Joint part no. 2 x øD through (mm) B Type A mounting bracket Type B mounting bracket 2 x øO counterbore J REC 32, 40 YU-03 YA-03 YB-03 E CY 50, 63 YU-05 YA-05 YB-05 Material: Stainless steel 80 YU-08 YA-08 YB-08 (mm) CX 100 YU-10 YA-10 YB-10 Bore size Part no. B D E J M øO (mm) MQ H YB-03 32, 40 12 7 25 9 34 11.5 depth 7.5 (With locking) RHC YB-05 50, 63 12 9 32 11 42 14.5 depth 8.5 K (Width across flats ø)
1 2 YB-08 80 16 11 38 13 52 18 depth 12 RZQ ø d ø d
YB-10 100 19 14 50 17 62 21 depth 14 LUT CUA Bore size Part no. T1 T2 V W RS Weight (g) (mm) Material: Chromium molybdenum steel (Nickel plated) YB-03 32, 40 6.5 10 18 50 9 80 Applicable bor Weight Part no. size (mm) UA C d1 d2 H K L UT (g) YB-05 50, 63 6.5 12 22 60 11 120 YU-03 32, 40 17 11 15.8 14 M8 x 1.25 8 7 6 25
YU-05 50, 63 17 13 19.8 18 M10 x 1.5 10 7 6 40 YB-08 80 8.5 16 28 75 14 230 YU-08 80 22 20 24.8 23 M16 x 2 13 9 8 90 D- YB-10 100 10.5 18 36 90 18 455 YU-10 100 26 26 29.8 28 M20 x 2.5 14 11 10 160 -X 1275 Series CQ2X Auto Switch Mounting 1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
ø32 to ø100 ≅U A B D-A9 D-A9V D-M9 D-M9V D-M9W D-M9WV D-M9A D-M9AV
D-A7 D-F79F ø32 to ø100 D-A80 D-F7NT D-A7H D-A73C D-A80H D-A80C D-F7 D-J79C U D-J79 D-A79W ≅ D-F7W D-F7WV D-J79W D-F7V A B
D-P3DW ø32 to ø100 ≅U B
A
D-P4DW ø40 to ø100
≅U A B Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto switch D-M9 D-A72/A7H/A80H model D-M9V D-A73C/A80C/F7 D-A9 D-M9 W D-A73 D-F79F/J79/F7V D-F7NT D-A79W D-P3DW D-P4DW D-A9V D-M9WV D-A80 D-M9A D-J79C/F7W D-M9AV D-J79W/F7WV Bore size A B A B A B A B A B A B AB AB 32 8 5 12 9 9 6 9.5 6.5 14.5 11.5 6.5 3.5 2.5 0 — — 40 12 7.5 16 11.5 13 8.5 13.5 9 18.5 14 10.5 6 6.5 2 9 4.5 50 10 10.5 14 14.5 11 11.5 11.5 12 16.5 17 8.5 9 4.5 4.5 7 7.5 63 12.5 13.5 16.5 17.5 13.5 14.5 14 15 19 20 11 12 7 7.5 9.5 10.5 80 15.5 18 19.5 22 16.5 19 17 19.5 22 24.5 14 16.5 10 12 12.5 15 100 20 23 24 27 21 24 21.5 24.5 26.5 29.5 18.5 21.5 14.5 17.5 17 20 Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting. Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto switch D-A7H model D-A80H D-M9V D-F7 /D-J79 D-A7 D-A73C D-F7 V D-A9 V D-M9WV D-F7 W D-J79C D-A79W D-P3DW D-P4DW D-A80 D-A80C D-F7 WV D-M9AV D-J79W D-F79F D-F7NT Bore size U U U U U U U U U U 32 27 29 31.5 32.5 38.5 35 38 34 34.5 — 40 30.5 32.5 35 36 42 38.5 41.5 37.5 38 44 50 36.5 38.5 41 42 48 44.5 47.5 43.5 44 50 63 40 42 47.5 48.5 54.5 51 54 50 47.5 56.5 80 50 52 57.5 58.5 64.5 61 64 60 57.5 66.5 100 60 62 67.5 68.5 74.5 71 74 70 67.5 76.5 1276 Auto Switch Mounting Series CQ2X
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
(mm) D-A9V D-F7W No. of auto D-M9V D-A7 D-M9WV D-M9 D-M9W D-A7H D-J79W switches D-F7 V D-A80 D-A9 D-M9 AV D-F7 D-A79W D-P3DW D-P4DW D-M9 A D-A80H D-F79F mounted D-J79C D-A73C D-F7 WV D-J79 D-F7NT D-A80C 1 pc. 5 5 10(5) 10 15(5) 15(10) 15(5) 15 20(10) 15 15 2 pcs. 5 10 10 15 15(5) 15 15(10) 20 20(15) 15 15 Note) The dimensions stated in ( ) shows the minimum stroke for the auto switch mounting when the auto switch does not project from the end surface of the cylinder body and hinder the lead wire bending space. (Refer to the figure below.) Order auto switches and auto switch mounting brackets separately.
Operating Range
(mm) Bore size Auto switch model 32 40 50 63 80 100 D-A9(V) 9.5 9.5 9.5 11.5 9 11.5 D-M9(V) D-M9W(V) 6 5.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 D-M9A(V) D-A7 (H)(C) 12 11 10 12 12 13 D-A80(H)(C) D-A79W 13 14 14 16 15 17 D-F7(V) D-J79(C) D-F7W(V) 6 6 6 6.5 6.5 7 D-F7NT D-F79F D-P3DW 6.5 6.5 5.5 7.5 7 8.5 D-P4DW — 5 5 5 5 5.5 ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment. ∗ Auto switch mounting brackets BQ2-012 are not used for sizes over ø32 of REA D-A9(V)/M9(V)/M9W(V)/M9A(V) types. The above values indicate the operating range when mounted with the conventional auto switch installation groove. REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1277 Series CQ2X Auto Switch Mounting 2
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Part No.
Auto switch Bore size (mm) mounting ø32, ø40, ø50 ø63, ø80, ø100 surface Port side Port side
C A C A
B B
Auto switch Auto switch mounting surface Auto switch mounting surface model Port side A, B, C side Port, A, B, C side qBQ-2 wBQ2-012 Two types of auto switch mounting bracket are used as a set. Set screw D-A9 (not used) D-A9V D-M9 No auto switch w No auto switch mounting D-M9V mounting bracket necessary. D-M9W bracket D-M9WV necessary. D-M9A D-M9AV q
Note 1) For CDQ232 to 50, when a compact auto switch is mounted on the three sides (A, B and C above) other than the port side of bore sizes ø32 to ø50, the auto switch mounting brackets above are required. Order them separately from cylinders. (It is the same as when mounting compact cylinders with an auto switch mounting rail, but not with a compact auto switch installation groove for CDQ263 to 100.) Example CDQ2XB32-100DM-M9BW······1 unit BQ-2······2 pcs. BQ2-012······2 pcs. Note 2) When the cylinder is shipped, an auto switch mounting bracket and auto switch are included in the shipment.
Bore size (mm) Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Weight Auto switch model ø32 ø40 to ø100 Auto switch mounting bracket part no. Applicable cylinder bore size Weight (g) D-A7/A80 BQ-2 ø32 to ø100 1.5 D-A73C/A80C BQ6-032S ø32 to ø100 5 D-A7H/A80H BQP1-050 ø40 to ø100 16 D-A79W D-F7/J79 D-F7V BQ-2 D-J79C D-F7W/J79W D-F7WV D-F79F/F7NT D-P3DW BQ6-032S D-P4DW — BQP1-050 Note) When the cylinder is shipped, an auto switch mounting bracket and auto switch are included in the shipment. However, ø40 to ø100 D-P4DW are assembled at the time of shipment.
1278 Auto Switch Mounting Series CQ2X
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features Applicable bore size D-A73 — Grommet (Perpendicular) D-A80 Without indicator light Reed ø32 to ø100 D-A73H, A76H — Grommet (in-line) D-A80H Without indicator light D-F7NV, F7PV, F7BV — Grommet (Perpendicular) D-F7NWV, F7BWV Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) D-F79, F7P, J79 — ø32 to ø100 Solid state D-F79W, F7PW, J79W Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet (in-line) D-F7NT With timer D-P5DW Magnetic field resistant (2-color indication) ø40 to ø100
∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 to 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H/Y7G/Y7H types) are also available. Refer to pages 1911 and 1913 for details.
REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1279 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2X ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40
How to Order
Mounting style B Basic style T Head side trunnion style L Axial foot style E Clevis integrated style Cylinder stroke (mm) F Rod side flange style BZ Boss-cut basic style Refer to "Standard Stroke" on page 1281. G Head side flange style FZ Boss-cut rod side C Single clevis style flange style Auto switch mounting bracket Note) D Double clevis style UZ Boss-cut rod side Note) This symbol is indicated when U Rod side trunnion style trunnion style the D-A9 or M9 type auto switch is specified. This mounting bracket does not apply to other auto switches CM2X L 40 150 (D-C7 and H7, etc.) (Nil) With auto switch CDM2X L 40 150 M9BW C Number of auto switches With auto switch Thread type Nil 2 pcs. (Built-in magnet) Nil Rc S 1 pc. Low speed cylinder TN NPT Bore size n n pcs. TF G Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 20 20 mm Auto switch If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto 25 25 mm switch is required, there is no need to enter 32 32 mm Nil Without auto switch the symbol for the auto switch. 40 40 mm ∗ For the applicable auto switch (Example) CDM2XF32-100 model, refer to the table below.
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to pages 1893 to 2007 for further information on auto switches. Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire (m) Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None entry (Output) DC AC Perpendicular In-line connector load
Indicator light Indicator (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N) 3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N — 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P — M9BV M9B — 2-wire 12 V — Connector — H7C — — Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39A — — — — — IC circuit Relay, Ye s 24 V — conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39A — — — — — — PLC Diagnostic 3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW — 5 V, 12 V IC circuit indication 3-wire (PNP) M9PWV M9PW — Grommet (2-color) 2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW — — Solid state auto switch With diagnostic output (2-color) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF � — IC circuit 3-wire — 5 V — A96V A96 — — — — IC circuit — Ye s (Equiv. NPN) 100 V A93V A93 — — — — Grommet No 100 V or less A90V A90 — — — — IC circuit Ye s 100 V, 200 V — B54 — — — Relay, No 200 V or less — B64 — — — — — PLC Ye s 12 V — — C73C — — Connector 2-wire 24 V No 24 V or less — C80C — — IC circuit Terminal — — A33A — — — — — PLC Reed auto switch conduit — A34A — — — — — Ye s 100 V, 200 V — Relay, DIN terminal — A44A — — — — — PLC Diagnostic indication (2-color) Grommet — — — B59W — — — — ∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ············ Nil (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order. 1 m ············ M (Example) M9NWM ∗ Do not add the suffix (N) indicating “no lead wire” to the part numbers of models D-A3A, 3 m ············ L (Example) M9NWL A44A, G39A and K39A. 5 m ············ Z (Example) M9NWZ None ········· N (Example) H7CN ∗ In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1293. ∗ Refer to pages 1960 and 1961 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector. ∗ D-A9/M9 auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.) 1280 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2X
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 Type Pneumatic Action Double acting, Single rod Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa Symbol Double acting, Single rod/Rubber bumper Minimum operating pressure 0.025 MPa Without auto switch: –10 to 70 C (No freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature ° With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (No freezing) Cushion Rubber bumper Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) Standard Stroke +1.4 mm Stroke length tolerance 0
Bore size Standard stroke (mm) (mm) Piston Speed 20 Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 25 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150 Piston speed (mm/s) 32 200, 250, 300 0.5 to 300 Allowable kinetic energy (J) 0.27 0.4 0.65 1.2 40 ∗ Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.) Mounting Bracket Part No. Precautions Bore size (mm) Mounting bracket Minimum Description (when ordering Be sure to read before handling. order 20 25 32 40 a minimum number) Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Axial foot∗ 2 CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B Foot 2 pcs., Mounting nut 1 pc. Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Flange 1 CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B Flange 1 pc. Actuator and Auto Switch Single clevis∗∗ 1 CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B Single clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs. ∗∗ Double clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs., Precautions. Double clevis (with pin) ∗∗∗ 1 CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B Clevis pin 1 pc., Retaining ring 2 pcs. Trunnion 1 pc., Trunnion (with nut) 1 CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B Operating Precautions Trunnion nut 1 pc. ∗ When ordering foot brackets, order 2 pieces per cylinder unit. Warning ∗∗ Three liners are included in the clevis bracket for adjusting an angle when mounting it. REA 1. Do not rotate the cover. ∗∗∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for ø40) are shipped together. • When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe fitting into the port, the coupling portion of the REB cover could break if the cover rotated. Mounting Style and Accessory Accessory Standard equipment Option REC Caution (3) (7) Mounting Rod end Clevis Single Double Clevis (4) Pivot (6) Pivot 1. Be careful of the retaining ring to pop out. knuckle knuckle bracket nut nut pin bracket bracket CY • When replacing the rod seal, take care that the Mounting joint joint pin retaining ring does not spring out while you are Basic style (1 pc.) — — removing it. CX Axial foot style (2) — — Maintenance Rod side flange style (1) — — — — MQ Head side flange style (1) — — Caution Clevis integrated style — Note 1) — RHC 1. Replacement parts/Seal kit Single clevis style — Note 1) — — Order it in accordance with the bore size. Double clevis style (3) — Note 1) Note 5) — — — RZQ Bore size Kit no. Contents Rod side trunnion style (1)Note 2) — — (mm) — Head side trunnion style (1)Note 2) — — 20 CM2X20-PS Rod seal: 1 pc. Boss-cut basic style 25 CM2X25-PS (1) — — Boss-cut flange style (1) — — — — 32 CM2X32-PS Grease pack (10 g): 1 pc. 40 CM2X40-PS Boss-cut trunnion style (1) — — 2. Grease pack Note 1) Mounting nut is not equipped with clevis integrated style, single clevis style and double clevis style. When maintenance requires only grease, Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion styles. use the following part numbers to order. Note 3) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with double clevis and double knuckle joint. (ø40 is Grease pack part no.: cotter pin.) GR-L-005 (5 g) Note 4) Pins and retaining rings are packed with clevis brackets. D- GR-L-010 (10 g) Note 5) Retaining rings (cotter pins for ø40) are included in the clevis pins. Note 6) Pivot brackets come with pins and retaining rings. GR-L-150 (150 g) -X Note 7) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings. 1281 Series CM2X
Basic Style (B)
CM2XB Bore size Stroke G Width across flats B2 2 GH 2 x P 2 x NN H1 (Rc, NPT, G) Width across flats B1 ø h8 E D NA ø 2 x ø Effective thread length MM AL 2 x FL NA Width across flats KA K FA N N H S + Stroke F ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 116 0 25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 120 0 32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 122 0 40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 154
Boss-cut Style (mm) Bore size (mm) ZZ 20 103 25 107 32 109 40 138
Axial Foot Style (L)
CM2XL Bore size Stroke
H AKF G 2 x P Width across flats B1 AL H2 (Rc, NPT, G) GF 2 x NN H1 (Effective thread length 2 x FL) Width across flats KA I D ø ø 2 x øLC B 4 x øLD LH MM N Width across flats NA N Width across flats B2 Y X S + Stroke X Y LX LT Z LS + Stroke LZ ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 D F FL G H H1 H2 I K KA LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ MM N NA NN P S X Y Z ZZ 20 18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 20 8 21 131 25 22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 20 8 25 135 32 22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 20 8 25 137 40 24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4 7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 23 10 27 171 ∗ Mounting bracket is supplied with the product. 1282 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2X
Rod Side Flange Style (F) CM2XF Bore size Stroke
4 x øFD Width across flats B2 H2 G 2 x P G Mounting hole 2 Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN C (Rc, NPT, G) I D ø B E FY ø ø
2 x øFD MM FX Width across flats NA Effective thread length ø40 Mounting hole Width across AL 1.5 FZ flats KA 2 x FL A K FT N ø20 to ø32 Z N H S + Stroke F ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke (mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D EF FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 37 116 0 25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 41 120 0 32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 41 122 0 40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 45 154
Boss-cut Style (mm) Bore size (mm) ZZ ∗ Mounting bracket is supplied with the product. 20 103 25 107 32 109 40 138
Head Side Flange Style (G) REA CM2XG Bore size Stroke REB
Effective thread length 2 x FL H2 Width across flats B2 2 x øFD 4 x øFD REC Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN G 2 x P G 2 Mounting hole Mounting (Rc, NPT, G) C hole CY I D E B ø ø FY ø CX
MM AL Width across flats NA N FX Width across AFK N FZ ø40 MQ flats KA S + Stroke FT H ø20 to ø32 Z + Stroke RHC ZZ + Stroke (mm) RZQ Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 C2 D E F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I 0 20 18 15.5 34 13 26 30 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 41 5 8 28 0 25 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 0 32 22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 7 4 60 — 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 0 40 24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 7 5 66 36 82 11 50 8 10 46.5
Bore size (mm) K KA MM N NA NN P S Z ZZ 20 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 62 107 116 25 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 62 111 120 32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 64 113 122 D- 40 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 88 143 154 ∗ Mounting bracket is supplied with the product. -X 1283 Series CM2X
Single Clevis Style (C) CM2XC Bore size Stroke
Effective thread length FL øCD Width across flats B1 H1 NN G 2 x P G I (Rc, NPT, G) ø CI D NA ø E ø ø
MM AL CX Width across flats KA A K FN N U NA H S + Stroke L +1.2 Z 0 + Stroke RR +1.2 ZZ 0 + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CI CD CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 13 24 9 10 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142 0 25 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146 0 32 22 19.5 17 30 9 10 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148 0 40 24 21 22 38 10 15 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188
Double Clevis Style (D) CM2XD Bore size Stroke
+0.058 Effective thread length FL øCD hole H10 0 –0.040 CL Width across flats B1 H1 NN G 2 x P G Axis d9 –0.076 I (Rc, NPT, G) ø D CI E NA ø ø ø
MM AL N U CX Width across flats KA A K FN CZ H S + Stroke L NA +1.2 Z 0 + Stroke RR +1.2 ZZ 0 + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN P RR S U Z ZZ 0 20 18 15.5 13 9 24 25 10 19 8 20–0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 9 62 14 133 142 0 25 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 10 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 9 62 14 137 146 0 32 22 19.5 17 9 30 25 10 19 12 26–0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 9 64 14 139 148 0 40 24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14 32–0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 11 88 18 177 188 ∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size ø40) are shipped together.
1284 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2X
Rod Side Trunnion Style (U) CM2XU Bore size Stroke
Width across flats B2 G 2 x P G 2 x NN Width across flats B1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G) TD ø D I ø ø TY E ø ø
MM TX AL Width across flats NA Effective thread length TZ Width across flats KA A K TT 2 x FL Z N N H S + Stroke F ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke (mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P 0 20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 0 25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 0 32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 0 40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 (mm) Bore size (mm) S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ ∗ Mounting bracket is supplied with the product. 20 62 8 10 32 32 52 36 116 25 62 9 10 40 40 60 40 120 32 64 9 10 40 40 60 40 122 40 88 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 154
Boss-cut Style (mm) Bore size (mm) ZZ 20 103 REA 25 107 32 109 REB 40 138 REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1285 Series CM2X
Head Side Trunnion Style (T) CM2XT Bore size Stroke
Effective thread length 2 x FL G Width across flats B2 2 x NN G 2 x P Width across flats B1 H1 (Rc, NPT, G) TD ø I TY D ø ø ø E ø
MM AL Width across flats NA TX Width across flats KA A K FN N TZ H S + Stroke TT Z + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 B2 D E F FL G H H1 I K KA MM N NA NN P 0 20 18 15.5 13 26 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 0 25 22 19.5 17 32 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 0 32 22 19.5 17 32 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 0 40 24 21 22 41 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm) Bore size (mm) S TD TT TX TY TZ Z ZZ ∗ Mounting bracket is supplied with the product. 20 62 8 10 32 32 52 108 118 25 62 9 10 40 40 60 112 122 32 64 9 10 40 40 60 114 124 40 88 10 11 53 53 77 143.5 154
1286 Low Speed Cylinder Double Acting, Single Rod Series CM2X
Clevis Integrated Style (E) CM2XE Bore size Stroke
LZ + Stroke ZZ + Stroke Z + Stroke LP H S + Stroke L RR A K FN UN NA AL G 2 x P G øCD CX H1 (Rc, NPT, G) øI D CI E NA ø ø ø
MM 2 x øLD LH Width across flats B1 NN Width across flats KA Effective thread length FL LF LG
LT LY LV Refer to page 1288 for details of clevis pivot bracket.
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CX D E F FL G H H1 I K KA L MM N NA NN 0 20 18 15.5 13 8 20 12 8 20 –0.033 13 10.5 8 41 5 28 5 6 12 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5 0 25 22 19.5 17 8 22 12 10 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 33.5 5.5 8 12 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5 0 32 22 19.5 17 10 27 20 12 26 –0.033 13 10.5 8 45 6 37.5 5.5 10 15 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5 0 40 24 21 22 10 33 20 14 32 –0.039 16 13.5 11 50 8 46.5 7 12 15 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm) Bore size (mm) P RR S U Z ZZ 20 9 62 11.5 115 124 25 9 62 11.5 119 128 32 12 64 14.5 124 136 40 12 88 14.5 153 165
REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1287 Series CM2X Accessory Bracket Dimensions
Single Knuckle Joint (mm) Single Knuckle Joint (mm)
I-020B, 032B Material: Rolled steel I-040B Material: Free cutting sulfur steel Y (Max.) ø ø
ø ø ø (Min.)
Applicable bore Bore size (mm) A H MM NDH10 NX1 U1 R2 Y Z Part no. size (mm) A A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX R1 U1 +0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1 20 18 41 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 11 66 I-020B 20 46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14 +0.058 –0.1 +0.058 –0.1 25, 32 22 45 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 14 10 14 69 I-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9 0 9 –0.2 10 14 +0.070 –0.1 +0.070 –0.1 40 24 50 M14 x 1.5 12 0 16 –0.3 20 14 13 92 I-040B 40 69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 0 16 –0.3 15.5 20
Double Knuckle Joint (mm)
Y (Max.) øND hole H10 Axis d9
(Min.)
Bore size (mm) A H L MM ND NX2 R2 U2 Y Z +0.2 20 18 41 25 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 11 66 +0.2 25, 32 22 45 25 M10 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 10 14 14 69 +0.3 40 24 50 49.7 M14 x 1.5 12 16 +0.1 13 25 13 92
Double Knuckle Joint (mm)
Y-020B, Y-032B Material: Rolled steel Y-040B Material: Cast iron
øND hole H10 øND hole H10 Axis d9 Axis d9 ø ø
Applicable bore Applicable pin Retaining ring Part no. size (mm) A A1 E1 L L1 MM ND NX NZ R1 U1 part number Cotter pin size +0.2 Y-020B 20 46 16 20 25 36 M8 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis +0.2 Y-032B 25, 32 48 18 20 25 38 M10 x 1.25 9 9 +0.1 18 5 14 CDP-1 Type C 9 for axis +0.3 Y-040B 40 68 22 24 49.7 55 M14 x 1.5 12 16 +0.1 38 13 25 CDP-3 ø3 x 18 L ∗ Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for ø40) are attached.
Double Clevis Pin/Material: Carbon steel (mm) Double Knuckle Pin/Material: Carbon steel (mm) Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size: ø40 Bore size: ø20, ø25, ø32 Bore size: ø40 CDP-1 CDP-2 CDP-1 CDP-3
2 x ø3 2 x ø3 Through hole ø Through hole ø ø ø ø ø
Retaining ring: Type C9 for axis Cotter pin Retaining ring: Type C9 for axis Cotter pin ø3 x 18 L ø3 x 18 L ∗ Retaining rings (copper pins for ø40) are included. ∗ Retaining rings (copper pins for ø40) are included. 1288 Accessory Bracket Dimensions Series CM2X
Rod End Nut (mm) Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2XE) (mm)
Material: Carbon steel Material: Rolled steel plate ø øLC hole Axis
Applicable bore Part no. size (mm) B C D d H NT-02 20 13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25 5 NT-03 25, 32 17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25 6 NT-04 40 22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5 8 2 x øLD
Mounting Nut (mm) Part no. Applicable bore L LC LD LE LF LG LH LR LT LX LY LV Applicable pin size (mm) part no. Material: Carbon steel CM-E020B 20, 25 24.5 8 6.8 22 15 30 30 10 3.2 12 59 18.4 CD-S02 CM-E032B 32, 40 34 10 9 25 15 40 40 13 4 20 75 28 CD-S03 Note 1) Clevis bracket pins and retaining rings are included. Note 2) It cannot be used for single clevis style (CM2C) and double clevis style (CM2D). ø
Clevis Pin (For CM2XE) (mm) Applicable bore Part no. size (mm) B C D d H Material: Carbon steel SN-020B 20 26 30 25.5 M20 x 1.5 8
SN-032B 25, 32 32 37 31.5 M26 x 1.5 8 ø ø
SN-040B 40 41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10 1
Trunnion Nut (mm) Applicable bore Applicable Part no. Dd9 d L L1 m t retaining ring Material: Carbon steel size (mm) part no. –0.040 CD-S02 20, 25 8 –0.076 7.6 24.5 19.5 1.6 0.9 Type C 8 for axis –0.040 CD-S03 32, 40 10 –0.076 9.6 34 29 1.35 1.15 Type C 10 for axis Note) Retaining rings are included. ø ø
Applicable bore Part no. size (mm) B C D d H TN-020B 20 26 28 25.5 M20 x 1.5 10 REA TN-032B 25, 32 32 34 31.5 M26 x 1.5 10 TN-040B 40 41 45 40.5 M32 x 2 10 REB REC CY
Regarding mounting bracket, accessory made of stainless steel (Some are not available.), refer to page 2048 for -XB12, External stainless steel cylinder. CX
Refer to Best Pneumatics No.2 for pivot brackets. MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1289 Series CM2X Auto Switch Mounting 1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height Reed auto switch Solid state auto switch D-M9 D-A9 ≅HS D-M9W D-M9A ≅HS 16
A 24.5 B 16 (22) ( ): Values for D-A96 A 22 B A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch. (24) ( ): Values for D-M9A A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch. D-A9V D-M9V ≅HS D-M9WV D-M9AV ≅HS 16
A 22 B 16
A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch. A 20 B (22)
( ): Values for D-M9AV A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch.
D-C7/C8 D-H7/H7W/H7NF
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch Auto switch
D-B5/B6/B59W D-G5NT
≅Hs ≅Hs
Auto switch Auto switch D-A33A/A34A D-G39A/K39A
≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ≅Hs G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø9.6) ø6.8 to ø9.6)
Auto switch Auto switch
D-A44A D-H7C
Auto switch Auto switch ≅Hs ≅Hs
G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D. ø6.8 to ø11.5)
D-C73C/C80C
Auto switch ≅Hs
1290 Auto Switch Mounting Series CM2X
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (mm) Auto switch model D-C7 D-A3 A D-H7 D-M9(V) D-B5 D-C80 D-G39A D-H7C D-M9W(V) D-A9(V) D-B59W D-G5NT D-B64 D-C73C D-K39A D-H7 W D-M9A(V) D-C80C D-A44A D-H7NF Bore size (mm) A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 20 11 9.5 7 5.5 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5 25 10 10 6 6 1 0 7 6 4 3 0.5 0 6 5 2.5 1.5 32 11.5 10.5 7.5 6.5 2 1 8 7 5 4 1.5 0.5 7 6 3.5 2.5 40 17.5 15.5 13.5 11.5 7 6 13 12 10 9 6.5 5.5 12 11 8.5 7.5 Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
Auto Switch Mounting Height (mm) Auto switch D-B5 D-C7 model D-M9V D-B64 D-C80 D-A3 A D-M9WV D-C73C D-B59W D-H7 D-G39A D-A44A D-M9AV D-C80C D-G5NT D-H7 W D-K39A D-A9V D-H7C D-H7NF Bore size (mm) Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs 20 23.5 25.5 22.5 25 60 69.5 25 26 28 25 27.5 62.5 72 32 29.5 31.5 28.5 31 66 75.5 40 33.5 35.5 32.5 35 70 79.5
REA REB REC CY CX MQ RHC RZQ
D- -X 1291 Series CM2X Auto Switch Mounting 2
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke
n: No. of auto switch (mm) No. of auto switch mounted Auto switch model 2 pcs. n pcs. 1 pc. Different surfaces Same surface Different surfaces Same surface (n-2) 20 + 35 55 + 35 (n-2) D-M9 5 20 55 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 35 55 + 35 (n-2) D-M9W 10 20 55 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 25 + 35 60 + 35 (n-2) D-M9A 10 25 60 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 15 + 35 50 + 35 (n-2) D-A9 5 15 50 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 35 35 + 35 (n-2) D-M9V 5 20 35 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 15 + 35 25 + 35 (n-2) D-A9V 5 15 25 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-M9WV 20 + 35 35 + 35 (n-2) 10 20 35 2 D-M9AV (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-C7 15 + 45 50 + 45 (n-2) 10 15 50 2 D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-H7 15 + 45 60 + 45 (n-2) D-H7W 10 15 60 2 D-H7NF (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-C73C 15 + 50 65 + 50 (n-2) D-C80C 10 15 65 2 D-H7C (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) D-B5/B64 15 + 50 75 + 55 (n-2) 10 15 75 2 D-G5NT (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n-2) 20 + 50 75 + 55 (n-2) D-B59W 15 20 75 2 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) D-A3A/G39A 35 + 30 (n-2) 100 + 100 (n-2) 10 35 100 D-K39A/A44A (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···) Note 3) When “n” is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation. Note 1) Auto switch mounting With 2 auto switches Different surfaces Same surface A 15 3.5
Auto switch model
B The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a direction Correct auto switch mounting position is 3.5 mm from the back (cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the auto switch and face of the switch holder. lead wire do not interfere with each other. D-M9 Less than 20 stroke Note 2) Less than 55 stroke Note 2) D-M9W D-M9A Less than 25 stroke Note 2) Less than 60 stroke Note 2) D-A9 — Less than 50 stroke Note 2) Note 2) Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting in styles other than those in Note 1. Operating Range (mm) (mm) Bore size (mm) Bore size (mm) Auto switch model Auto switch model 20 25 32 40 20 25 32 40 D-A9(V) 6 6 6 6 D-B59W 12 12 13 13 D-M9 (V) D-H7 /H7 W 4 4 4.5 5 D-M9W(V) 3.5 3 3.5 3 D-G5NT/H7NF D-M9A(V) D-H7C 7 8.5 9 10 D-C7/C80 D-G39A/K39A 8 9 9 9 7 8 8 8 D-C73C/C80C D-B5/B64 8 8 9 9 D-A3A/A44A ∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion) There may be the case it will vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
1292 Auto Switch Mounting Series CM2X
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm) Auto switch model ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40 D-M9 (V) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) D-M9W(V) BM5-020 BM5-025 BM5-032 BM5-040 D-A9(V)
Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) Note 2) D-M9A(V) BM5-020S BM5-025S BM5-032S BM5-040S D-C7/C80 D-C73C/C80C D-H7 BM2-020 BM2-025 BM2-032 BM2-040 D-H7W D-H7NF D-B5/B64 D-B59W BA2-020 BA2-025 BA2-032 BA2-040 D-G5NT D-G5NB D-A3 A/A44A BM3-020 BM3-025 BM3-032 BM3-040 D-G39A/K39A Note 1) Set part number which includes the auto switch mounting band (BM2-A) and the holder kit (BJ5-1/Switch bracket: Transparent). Since the switch bracket (made from nylon) is affected in an environment where alcohol, chloroform, methylamines, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid is splashed over, so it cannot be used. Please consult SMC regarding other chemicals. Note 2) Set part number which includes the auto switch mounting band (BM2-AS) and the holder kit (BJ4-1/Switch bracket: White). Note 3) For the D-M9A (V) type auto switch, do not install the switch bracket on the indicator light.
a Switch bracket (Resin) Auto switch b Switch holder (Zinc)
d REA Auto switch mounting screw qBJ-1: A set of a and b in the figure. REB wBM2-A(S): A set of c and d in the figure. Band (c) is mounted so that the projected part is REC on the internal side (contact side with the tube). BJ4-1(Switch bracket: White) c BJ5-1(Switch bracket: Transparent) CY Auto switch mounting band CX Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted. MQ For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1893 to 2007. Auto switch type Model Electrical entry (Direction) Features RHC D-B53, C73, C76 — Reed D-C80 Without indicator light RZQ D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B Grommet (In-line) — Solid state D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) D-G5NT With timer ∗ With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1960 to 1961. ∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1911. ∗ Wide range detection type, solid state auto switches (D-G5NB type) are also available. Refer to page 1953 for details.
D- -X 1293 Series CQSY/CQ2Y Series CQSX/CQ2X Compact Foot Type (Mounting bracket)
Added compact type foot brackets.
Overall width reduced by up to 43% (for ø12) ¡Compact foot bracket has the same width as the cylinder in order to shorten the overall width.
More compact installation space possible ¡Short pitch mounting is possible. ¡Allows installation close against a wall.
Overall width shortened. Compact foot bracket
New Installed state Shortened installation width New Compact Existing Reduced width for short Bore size foot type foot type pitch mounting (mm) (mm) width A (mm) width B (mm) 1 unit 2 units 3 units 12 25 44 19 38 57 16 29 48 19 38 57 20 36 62 26 52 78 A 25 40 66 26 52 78 32 45 71 26 52 78 Existing model 40 52 78 26 52 78 50 64 95 31 62 93 63 77 113 36 72 108 80 98 140 42 84 126 100 117 162 45 90 135 ∗ Short pitch mounting is possible only without auto switch. Consult with SMC for mounting with auto switch. B
Height from the bottom of brackets to the center of a cylinder is the same as the existing model.
New Compact foot bracket Existing foot bracket
LH2 = LH1
LH2 LH1
1294 Series CQSY/CQ2Y Compact Foot Type (Mounting bracket) Series CQSX/CQ2X
How to Order
Applicable series model no.LC Each series standard model no.
Mounting bracket LC Compact foot
Product name Series Model Action Smooth cylinder C(D)Q2Y Double acting, Single rod Compact cylinder CQ2 Low-speed cylinder C(D)Q2X Double acting, Single rod Compact cylinder/ Smooth cylinder C(D)QSY Double acting, Single rod CQS Compact type Low-speed cylinder C(D)QSX Double acting, Single rod Note 1) When ordering compact foot brackets, order 2 pieces per cylinder. Note 2) Body mounting bolts are included with compact foot brackets. (All models)
Dimensions ∗ Consult with SMC for details on combination with each cylinder series. ø12 to ø25 Applicable Cylinders/Compact Foot Mounting Bracket Part No. Bracket part no. Series Model Action Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 CQSY Double acting, Single rod CQS CQS-LC012 CQS-LC016 CQS-LC020 CQS-LC025 CQSX Double acting, Single rod
Special cap bolt (Accessory)
LY Compact Foot Bracket Dimensions LH LT Bore size øLD LH LT LX LY LZ X Y ø12 4.5 17 2 15.5 29.5 25 9.3 4.5 LX 4 x øLD ø16 4.5 19 2 20 33.5 29 9.3 5 REA Y X Cylinder length YX LZ ø20 6.6 24 3.2 25.5 42 36 13.2 5.8 Cylinder length + 2X ø25 6.6 26 3.2 28 46 40 13.2 5.8 REB REC ø32 to ø100 Applicable Cylinders/Compact Foot Mounting Bracket Part No. CY Bracket part no. Series Model Action Bore size (mm) CX 32 40 50 63 80 100 CQ2Y Double acting, Single rod CQ2 CQ-LC032 CQ-LC040 CQ-LC050 CQ-LC063 CQ-LC080 CQ-LC100 MQ CQ2X Double acting, Single rod RHC Special cap bolt (Accessory) RZQ
LY Compact Foot Bracket Dimensions LH LT Bore size øLD LH LT LX LY LZ X Y ø32 6.6 30 3.2 34 57 45 13.7 5.8 LX 4 x øLD Y X Cylinder length XY ø40 6.6 33 3.2 40 64 52 13.7 7 LZ ø50 9 39 3.2 50 78 64 16.7 8 Cylinder length + 2X ø63 11 46 3.2 60 91.5 77 18.2 9 ø80 13 59 4.5 77 114 98 22.5 11 ø100 13 71 6 94 136 117 24 12.5 D- -X 1295 Series 10-, 11-CQSX,CQ2X
Clean Series Low Speed Cylinder Series 10-, 11-
The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room graded Class 100 by making an actuator’s rod section a double seal construction and discharging by relief port directly to the outside of clean room. Since the external dimensions and applicable auto switches are the same as standard type, refer to the separate catalog of “Pneumatic Clean Series”. Series 10-, 11-CQSX Series 10-, 11-CQ2X How to Order How to Order Clean Series Clean Series 10 Relief type 10 Relief type 11 Vacuum type 11 Vacuum type 10 C(D)QSX B 20 30 D M9BW 10 C(D)Q2XB 40 30 D J79W With auto switch With auto switch (Built-in magnet) (Built-in magnet) Low speed cylinder Low speed cylinder Mounting style Bore size 32 32 mm B Through-hole/Both ends Number of tapped common (Standard) auto switches 40 40 mm Number of 50 50 mm Bore size Nil 2 pcs. auto switches 63 63 mm 12 12 mm S 1 pc. Nil 2 pcs. 16 16 mm n “n” pcs. S 1 pc. Port thread type 20 20 mm n “n” pcs. Nil Rc 25 25 mm Auto switch TN NPT ø32 to ø100 Without auto switch Cylinder stroke (mm) Nil TF G (Built-in magnet) Bore size Standard stroke ∗ Without auto switch, ø32, 5 strokes: (mm) (mm) ∗ For the applicable auto M thread switch model, refer to 12, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 page 1261. 20 ∗ Auto switches are Cylinder stroke (mm) 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, shipped together, (but not 25 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 assembled). Action Manufacturing of Intermediate stroke D Double acting Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval Rod end thread are available by using spacers with Nil Standard (Rod end female thread) standard stroke cylinders. The overall Standard stroke length of cylinder will be the same as the M Rod end male thread standard stroke with a longer one. Bore size Standard stroke Auto switch Example) 3 mm width spacer is installed in Action (mm) (mm) Without auto switch Nil the standard cylinder D Double acting 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, (Built-in magnet) 10-CQSXB25-50D to make 32, 40 10-CQSXB25-47D. 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100 ∗ For the applicable auto 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, switch model, refer to 50, 63 page 1268. Specifications 40, 45, 50, 75, 100 Bore size 10- (Relief type) ∗ Auto switches are shipped together, (but (mm) 12 16 20 25 Manufacturing of Intermediate stroke Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval not assembled). Air Fluid are available by using spacers with Proof pressure 1.5 MPa standard stroke cylinders. But, as for ø40 Rod end thread Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa with damper, please consult SMC Standard (Rod end female thread) Minimum operating pressure 0.04 MPa 0.035 MPa separately. Nil Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C Example) 18 mm width spacer is installed M Rod end male thread Ambient and fluid temperature in the standard cylinder With auto switch: –10 to 60°C 10-CQ2XB40-75D to make Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s 10-CQ2XB40-57D. Piston rod size ø6 ø8 ø10 ø12 Female thread M3 x 0.5 M4 x 0.7 M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 Rod end thread Specifications Male thread M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 Bore size 10- (Relief type) 11- (Vacuum type) Stroke tolerance +1.0 mm 0 (mm) 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63 Port size M5 x 0.8 Fluid Air Vacuum port, Relief port M5 x 0.8 Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Bore size 11- (Vacuum type) Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa (mm) 12 16 20 25 Minimum operating pressure 0.035 MPa 0.03 MPa 0.025 MPa 0.02 MPa Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C Fluid Air Ambient and fluid temperature Proof pressure 1.5 MPa With auto switch: –10 to 60°C Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s Minimum operating pressure 0.03 MPa 0.025 MPa Piston rod size ø16 ø20 ø16 ø20 Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C Female thread M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.5 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.5 Ambient and fluid temperature Rod end thread With auto switch: –10 to 60°C Male thread M14 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 M14 x 1.5 M18 x 1.5 +1.0 Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 mm Note) Note) Piston rod size ø6 ø8 ø10 ø12 Port size M5 x 0.8, 1/8 1/4 M5 x 0.8, 1/8 1/4 Female thread M3 x 0.5 M4 x 0.7 M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 Vacuum port, Relief port M5 x 0.8 Rod end thread Male thread M5 x 0.8 M6 x 1.0 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 Note) Only 5 stroke comes with M5 x 0.8 in the case of no auto switch on ø32. +1.0 Stroke tolerance 0 mm Port size M5 x 0.8 Vacuum port, Relief port M5 x 0.8
1296 Clean Series Low Speed Cylinder Series 10-, 11-CM2X
10-,11- CM2X Series How to Order
Clean Series Mounting style 10 Relief type B Basic style 11 Vacuum type L Axial foot style F Rod side flange style 10 L 40 150 M9BW C G Head side flange style C(D)M2X BZ Boss-cut basic style With auto switch Boss-cut rod style FZ (Built-in magnet) Flange style
Low speed cylinder Auto switch mounting bracket Note) Note) This symbol is indicated when the D-A9 Bore size Number of or M9 type auto switch is specified. 20 20 mm auto switches This mounting bracket does not apply to Port thread type 25 25 mm Nil 2 pcs. other auto switches (D-C7 and H7, etc.) (Nil) 32 32 mm Nil Rc S 1 pc. 40 40 mm TN NPT n “n” pcs. TF G Auto switch Without auto switch Nil (Built-in magnet) Standard Stroke ∗ For the applicable Bore size auto switch model, Clean series Standard stroke (mm) (mm) refer to page 1280. 20 10- 25 (Relief type) 32 Cylinder stroke (mm) 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300 Refer to “Standard Stroke” on the left. 20 11- 25 (Vacuum type) 32 40 ∗ Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.) Specifications Bore size 10- (Relief type) 11- (Vacuum type) (mm) 20 25 32 40 20 25 32 40 Fluid Air Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa Minimum operating pressure 0.035 MPa 0.025 MPa Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C REA Ambient and fluid temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60°C Cushion Rubber bumper REB Piston speed 1 to 200 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s Piston rod size ø8 ø10 ø12 ø14 ø8 ø10 ø12 ø14 Rod end thread M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 M8 x 1.25 M10 x 1.25 M14 x 1.5 REC +1.4 Stroke tolerance 0 mm Port size 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 Vacuum port, Refief port M5 x 0.8 CY CX Precautions MQ
Be sure to read before handling. RHC Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions. Refer to the Clean Series catalog separately for the precautions in clean environments. RZQ
Operating Precautions Maintenance Warning Caution 1. Do not rotate the cover. 1. Grease pack • When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe fitting into the port, the When maintenance requires only grease, use the following part coupling portion of the cover could break if the cover rotated. number to order. Caution Grease pack part no.: GR-X-005 (5 g) 1. Be careful of the snap ring to pop out. D- • When replacing the rod seal, take care that the snap ring does not spring out while you are removing it. -X 1297 Related Products: Made to Order Specifications: -XB13: Low Speed Cylinder 5 to 50 mm/s (CY1/CY3: 7 to 50 mm/s)
Symbol Low Speed Cylinder -XB13
CY1 CG1 Standard model no. XB13 CY3 Standard model no. XB13
M MB Standard model no. XB13 MGPL Standard model no. XB13
Low speed cylinder MGGM Standard model no. XB13
MGCM Standard model no. XB13
CX2 Standard model no. XB13
M CXWL Standard model no. XB13
M CXSL Standard model no. XB13 MXH MXU Standard model no. XB13
M CXTL M Standard model no. XB13 CXSJL Note) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator. Low speed cylinder
Specifications
Magnetically Compact Guide Applicable Air cylinder coupled Platform guide cylinder Slide unit Dual rod cylinder Compact slide cylinder Standard rodless cylinder cylinder cylinder Slide bearing 1 M M M M M Series CG1 MB CY3 MGPL MGGM MGCM CX2 CXWL CXSJL CXSL MXH MXU CXTL Action Double acting, Single rod Double acting CY3B: 6, 10, 20, 25, 32 32, 40 12, 16, 20 20, 25, 32 20, 25 10, 16 6, 10 6, 10 12, 16 15, 20, 25, 32 25, 32, 40 6, 10 6, 10 40, 50, 63 50, 63 40, 50, 63 40, 50, 63 32, 40 10, 15 20, 25 15, 20 15, 20 20, 25 Bore size (mm) 50, 63, 80 80, 100 80, 100 CY1S, 80, 100 50 25 32 25, 32 25, 32 16, 20 16 32, 40 CY1L: 6 to 40 100 7 to 50 5 to 50 Piston speed 5 to 50 mm/s mm/s mm/s 5 to 50 mm/s Air Shock Rubber cushion Rubber bumper Rubber Cushion Rubber bumper absorber bumper on (Basic cylinder) (CX2: Option) bumper both ends Auto switch Mountable Basic Basic Foot Foot Basic Basic Mounting Flange Flange Front mounting Basic Slider Basic Trunnion Clevis Flange Clevis Trunnion Dimensions Additional Dimensions and specifications are the same as standard products of double acting. specifications ∗ No shock absorber is available for the Series MGGM.
1298 Related Products: Speed Controller for Low Speed Operation The effective area of controlled flow is approximately 1/10 of the standard type. These controllers are suitable for controlling the speed of microspeed cylinders. The dual type speed controller is especially suitable for cylinders with a small bore size.
Elbow/Universal Type Air Flow/Effective Area AS12 1FM-M5 AS22 1FM- 01 Model AS221FM-02 AS131FM-M5 AS231FM-01 AS231FM-02
Tubing Metric size ø3.2, ø4, ø6 ø3.2, ø4 ø6, ø8 ø4 ø6 ø8, ø10 O.D. ø1/8", ø5/32", ø3/16" ø3/16", ø1/4" ø1/4", ø5/16" Inch size ø1/4" ø1/8", ø5/32" ø5/16" ø5/32" ø3/16" ø3/8" Controlled Air flow (L/min (ANR)) 7 12 38 flow Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6 Flow rate (L/min (ANR)) 100 180 230 260 390 460 Free flow Effective area (mm2) 1.5 2.7 3.5 4 6 7 Note) Supply pressure: 0.5 MPa, Temperature: 20°C
In-line Type Air Flow/Effective Area Model AS1001FM AS2001FM AS2051FM Tubing Metric size ø3.2, ø4, ø6 ø4 ø6 ø6 ø8 O.D. ø1/8", ø5/32", ø3/16" Inch size ø1/4" ø5/32" ø3/16", ø1/4" ø3/16" ø1/4", ø5/16" Controlled Air flow (L/min (ANR)) 7 12 38 flow Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6 Flow rate (L/min (ANR)) 100 130 230 290 460 Free flow Effective area (mm2) 1.5 2 3.5 4.5 7 Note) Supply pressure: 0.5 MPa, Temperature: 20°C Elbow Type (Metal body)
Air Flow/Effective Area Model AS120M AS220M-01 AS220M-02 Cylinder side R 1/8 R 1/4 Port size M5 x 0.8 10-32 UNF NPT 1/8 NPT 1/4 Tube side Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4 Air flow (L/min (ANR)) 7 12 38 Controlled flow Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6 REA Flow rate (L/min (ANR)) 105 280 420 Free flow Effective area (mm2) 1.6 4.3 6.5 REB Note) Supply pressure: 0.5 MPa, Temperature: 20°C REC Dual Type CY Air Flow/Effective Area Model ASD230FM-M5 ASD330FM-01 ASD430FM-02 CX Metric size ø4, ø6 ø6, ø8 ø6 ø8, ø10 Tubing O.D. ø1/8", ø5/32" ø1/4", ø5/16" MQ Inch size ø3/16", ø1/4" — ø3/16", ø1/4" ø3/8"
Controlled flow Air flow (L/min (ANR)) 7 12 38 RHC (Free flow) Effective area (mm2) 0.1 0.2 0.6 RZQ Note) Supply pressure: 0.5 MPa, Temperature: 20°C
D- -X 1299 Low Speed Cylinder Specific Product Precautions 1 Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit Warning Horizontal Operation I II
∗ ∗
Dual speed controller Meter-in speed controller Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the Meter-in speed controllers can reduce lurching while controlling meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip. More stable low speed the speed. The two adjustment needles facilitate adjustment. operation can be achieved than meter-in circuit alone. Vertical Operation
∗ P2 I W II ∗ P1 A a (c)
(b) P0
P0 ∗ a ∗ A W
(1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently (1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗ the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.∗ (2) Depending on the size of the load, installing a regulator with (2) Installing a regulator with check valve at position (c) can check valve at position (b) can deduce lurching during reduce lurching during descent and operation delay during descent and operation delay during ascent. ascent. As a guide, As a guide, when W + P0a>P0A, adjust P2 to make W + P2A = P0a. adjust P1 to make W + P1a = P0A.
W: Load (N) P0: Operating pressure (MPa) P1, P2: Reduced pressure (MPa) a: Rod side piston area (mm2) A: Head side piston area (mm2) Warning Since CJ2X, CUX10 are subject to internal leakage due to their construction, the speed may not be fully controlled with the meter-out controller (∗) during low speed operation. Selection Pneumatic Circuit Caution Caution 1. Operate within the standard strokes. 1. The piping length between the speed controller and Operating with the stroke exceeding the standard stroke may the cylinder port must be kept as short as possible. cause malfunction. If the speed controller and the cylinder port are far apart, 2. Provide a construction that does not apply a lateral speed adjustment may be unstable. load to the cylinder. 2. Use a low speed controller to easily adjust for low Applying a lateral load to the cylinder may cause malfunction. speed operation or a dual speed controller (Series 3. Do not use the product at a high frequency. ASD) to prevent cylinders from popping out. Use it at 30 cpm or less as a guideline. (When the low speed controller is used, the maximum speed 4. Do not wipe out the grease in the sliding part of the may be limited.) air cylinder. Doing so forcefully may cause malfunction.
1300 Low Speed Cylinder Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matter 39 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 12 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Design Air Supply Caution Warning 1. Design the system to prevent vibration from being 1. Use clean air. applied to the cylinder. Do not use compressed air that is tainted with chemicals, A malfunction may occur due to the vibration. synthetic oils containing organic solvents, salt or corrosive 2. Avoid using a guide with obvious variations in gases, as it can cause damage or malfunctions. operating resistance. 2. Take measures to prevent pressure fluctuation. Operation may become unstable when using a guide that Malfunctions may occur with the fluctuation of pressure. manifests variations in operating resistance, or when the external load changes. Operating Environment 3. Avoid a system structure in which the mounting orientation changes. Warning Operation may become unstable if the mounting orientation 1. Do not use in environments where there is a danger changes. of corrosion. 4. Avoid operation where the temperature fluctuates 2. Do not use in dusty environments or where greatly. Also, when using at low temperatures, exposure to water and oil spray or splash are make sure that frost does not form inside the expected. cylinder and on the piston rod. Operation may become unstable. 5. Adjust the speed in accordance with the operating Lubrication of Actuators environment. When the operating environment changes, the speed Caution adjustment will be off unless it is reset to reflect operation in 1. The microspeed cylinder and the microspeed the new environment. cylinder with clean room specifications use different types of grease. For the microspeed Cushion cylinder with clean room specifications, use GR-X-005 (5g pack). Caution 1. Readjust cushion using the cushion needle. Cushions are adjusted at the time of shipment. However, the REA cushion needle on the cover should be readjusted when the product is put into service, based on factors such as the size REB of the load and the operating speed. When the cushion needle is turned clockwise, the restriction becomes smaller and the REC cushion's effectiveness is increased. Tighten the lock nut securely after adjustment is performed. A malfunction may CY occur when the restriction becomes smaller. 2. Do not operate with the cushion needle fully closed. CX This will cause damage to the seals. MQ
Lubrication RHC Caution RZQ 1. Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator. Malfunction may occur when lubricated in this fashion. 2. Only use the grease recommended by SMC. The microspeed cylinder and the microspeed cylinder with clean room specifications use different types of grease. The use of grease other than the specified type can cause malfunctions and particulate generation. D- -X 1301